San Carlos City Council
May 23, 2022

2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; white where required to match Architect samples.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 456 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 21 00 - 3 Non-Load Bearing Brick Masonry

3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

4. Aggregates: Standard ASTM C144 masonry type; clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.

5. Water: Clean, drinkable, free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter and other harmful materials.

6. Integral Color: ASTM C979 pure mineral oxide colors as required to provide grout matching Architect samples.

F. Anchors: Two-piece assemblies which permit vertical and horizontal differential movement between wall and framework, while resisting forces perpendicular to wall.

1. Type: As recommended by manufacturer for back-up system indicated and complying with California Building Code.

2. Material: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Dur-O-Wall.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
c. A.A. Wire Products Co.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Drain Net (Rainscreen Cavity Drainage Mats): Provide fluid-conducting, nonabsorbent polymer mesh cavity drainage mats.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohman & Barnard, Inc./Mortar Net.
b. Archovations Inc./CavClear Masonry Mat.
c. Advanced Building Products/Mortar Break.
d. Heckman Building Products/Mortar Net.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

B. Cavity Vents: Provide vents for weeping brick masonry cavity.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohman & Barnard, Inc./QV – Quadro-Vent.
b. Archovations Inc./CavClear Weep Vents.
c. Advanced Building Products/Mortar Maze Weep Vents.
d. Heckman Building Products/No. 85 Cell Vent.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Basis of Design: Hohman & Barnard/QV Quadro-Vent.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Control Joints: Preformed neoprene or high-grade synthetic rubber compound conforming to ASTM D2000, Shore A durometer of 70; size and profile indicated or as required for complete installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 457 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 21 00 - 4 Non-Load Bearing Brick Masonry
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Supply metal anchors to applicable structural trade for placement and direct correct placement.

B. Ensure items built in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized.

C. Establish lines, levels and coursing; protect from disturbance.

D. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure anchors to structure.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Masonry: Place brick masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and applicable code requirements.

1. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections.

2. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint, with mortar raked back 1/4" regardless of joint treatment.

3. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

4. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set; where adjustment must be made, remove mortar, and replace.

5. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight and true, unchipped edges.

6. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height; make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness; lay in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work.

7. Lay brick masonry in running bond unless otherwise indicated.

8. Form dense, rodded mortar joints.

B. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Place masonry reinforcement and anchorage as required by code, but not less than one tie every 24" vertically and horizontally, staggered in alternate courses.

1. Ensure cavity wall horizontal reinforcing has been properly embedded in back-up.

2. Secure anchorage for brick masonry at maximum 3" on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12" of openings.

3. Fully reinforce corners and intersections every mortar joint.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 458 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 21 00 - 5 Non-Load Bearing Brick Masonry
C. Flashings: Place through-wall flashings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required to direct water to exterior at weeps at foundation and at heads of openings.

1. Extend flashings through brick masonry, turn up minimum 8"; seal to sheathing over framed back-up.

2. Lap end joints minimum 6" and seal watertight; use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

D. Cavity Wall Vents: Install cavity vents at 24" on center horizontally above through-wall flashings, shelf angles, and at bottom of walls; keep vents free of debris or mortar.

E. Control Joints: Do not continue horizontal masonry reinforcing across joints.

F. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in steel angle lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates and other items supplied by other trades.

1. Build in items plumb and true to lines and levels.

2. Do not build in organic materials which will be subject to decomposition or deterioration.

G. Site Tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit shall be 1/32".

2. Maximum variation from vertical and horizontal building lines is 1/4" in 10'-0".

3. Maximum variation from cross sectional thickness of walls is plus or minus 1/4".

4. Maintain flush face on exposed brick masonry surfaces.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of brick masonry work.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work.

B. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces using non-acidic solution of type recommended by masonry manufacturer, which will not harm masonry or adjacent construction.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities; protect without damaging completed work.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 459 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 1 Concrete Unit Masonry
SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide concrete masonry unit construction, with mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Cut and fit concrete masonry for work of other trades.

B. Work Installed But Not Furnished: Build in items supplied by other trades and suppliers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's certificate concrete masonry units conform to specified standards.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish drawings for reinforcing; show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, ties and arrangements and assemblies.

C. Samples: Furnish section of exposed concrete masonry face indicating texture and color along with each type of colored mortar.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 4'-0" by 6'-0" sample panel of concrete masonry construction, clearly indicating joints and methods of reinforcing. Erect mock-up at Project Site, in location as approved by Architect.

1. Approved mock-up will be used for quality control as minimum standard of work acceptable for Project.

2. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain materials to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 460 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 2 Concrete Unit Masonry

2. During colder weather, work may continue where equipment is used to maintain constant temperature above 40 degrees F and masonry work completed and in progress is kept covered.

3. Protect masonry construction from direct wind and sun exposure when temperatures exceed 99 degrees F and relative humidity is less than 50 percent.

B. Bracing: Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work, maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide concrete masonry unit construction, with mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of California Building Standards Code except where more restrictive requirements are specified.

1. Fire Rated Materials: Provide materials and systems which have passed ASTM E119 tests and are approved for fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow loadbearing units conforming to ASTM C90.

1. Concrete Masonry Manufacturers:
a. Basalite Concrete Products.
b. Angelus Block, Co., Inc.
c. Orco Block Co., Inc.
d. RCP Block and Brick, Inc.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Weight and Compressive Strength: Refer to Structural Drawings.

3. Size: Nominal 8" by 16" face measurement with thickness as indicated on Drawings.

4. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with finish as approved by Architect prior to manufacturing; uniform texture and color throughout Project. a. Texture: Ground face matching Basalite/490 unless otherwise indicated. b. Colors: Integral color as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

5. Special Shapes: Provide proper specially shaped units for bond beams, lintels, corners, and jambs.
a. Exposed Special Shapes: Design bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs and fillers to match and compliment block units; where required perform cutting with masonry saw.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 461 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 3 Concrete Unit Masonry
D. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C270, Type as indicated on Structural Drawings.

1. Masonry Cement/Premix Mortar: Acceptable only if manufacturer certifies product is made of cement and lime, with no limestone or pulverized material used in lieu of hydrated lime.

E. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476; minimum compressive strength as indicated on Structural Drawings.

1. Grout Slump: Between 8” and 11”.

2. Grout shall contain no water reducers or plasticizers.

F. Mortar and Grout Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

3. Aggregates: Standard masonry mortar and grout type; clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter.
a. Mortar Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C144.
b. Grout Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C404.

4. Water: Clean, drinkable, free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other harmful materials.

5. Exposed Mortar Colors: Integral color as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

G. Color Admixtures: Pure mineral oxide colors conforming to ASTM C979 as required for approved colors.

H. Reinforcement and Anchorages: Provide reinforcing and anchorages as indicated on Drawings.

1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Plain Bars: ASTM A675, Grade 80 for No. 2 bars, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A82, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits.

I. Control Joints: Closed cell neoprene or PVC factory fabricated solid sections, resistant to oils and solvents, flexible at temperatures from 40-degree F after five hours exposure; ASTM D2240 minimum durometer 70.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 462 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 4 Concrete Unit Masonry
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Supply metal anchors required for concrete masonry to appropriate trades for placement; provide in quantities required for Project and direct placement.

1. Ensure items built in by other trades are properly located and sized.

B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing, protect from disturbance.

C. Clean surfaces to receive masonry free from dirt, debris, and laitance.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not wet concrete masonry units; lay units in mortar with full bed and head joints, properly jointed with other work.

1. Fully bond corners and intersections.

2. Align cells of units to maintain clear, unobstructed space for reinforcing and grout, keep cells free of mortar and debris.

B. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set, where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

C. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not acceptable.

D. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight, true, unchipped edges.

E. Provide structural anchorage or retention in accordance with applicable code requirements.

F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height, make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness.

1. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond unless otherwise indicated.

2. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8" unless other size masonry units are required.

G. Remove excess mortar and projections, take care to prevent breaking block corners.

H. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 530.1/TMS 602 except where more restrictive tolerances are listed below.

1. Maximum allowable variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32" where masonry units are exposed in finished construction and where waterproofing is applied over masonry units.

2. Maximum allowable variation from plane of wall is 1/4" in 10 feet, and maximum 1/2" in 20 feet or more.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 463 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 5 Concrete Unit Masonry

3. Maximum allowable variation from plumb is 1/4" per story, non-cumulative, and maximum 1/2" in two or more stories.

4. Maximum allowable variation of level coursing is 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4" in 10 feet and 1/2" in 30 feet.

I. Mortar Joints: Compress joints with a round or curved metal tool to form a waterproof joint and a tight bond with concrete masonry units.

1. Compress mortar joints with jointing tool with minimum diameter three times width of mortar joint, to provide a flush surface where resilient base or waterproofing is to be applied over masonry.

2. Mortar joint that are cracked or not bonded with face shells of concrete masonry units shall be removed and joints repointed prior to grout placement.

J. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Fully reinforce corners and intersections. Lap splices minimum 6". Extend splices minimum 16" each side of openings.

1. Support and secure reinforcing bars to maintain within 1/2" of dimensioned position.

2. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not to exceed 192 bar diameters.

K. Lintels: Provide reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled.

1. Use full length reinforcing bars.

L. Grouting: Place grout when concrete masonry units are surface dry; consolidate and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration.

1. Fine Grout: Use for spaces less than 2" in width using low lift grouting techniques.

2. Coarse Grout: Use for spaces 2" or more in width.

3. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout approximately 2" below top of upper masonry unit to form positive key for subsequent grout placement.

4. Low-Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout at 16" and place subsequent lifts at 8" increments.

5. Hi-Lift Grouting: Use only where specifically approved by Architect and only where grout spaces are 3" or greater in width.
a. Provide minimum 4" high cleanouts at bottom of each cell to be grouted, clean out cells and inspect prior to grouting.
b. Pump grout into cells with maximum 48" lifts.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 464 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
04 22 00 - 6 Concrete Unit Masonry
M. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in frames, lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other trades.

1. Build in items plumb and true.

2. Do not build in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration.

3. Bed anchors of frames in mortar joints; fill frame voids solid with mortar; fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings.

N. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds; coordinate with work of other Specification sections to ensure correct size, shape, and location.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work.

B. Point or replace defective mortar, match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials, consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities; protect without damaging completed work.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 465 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 1 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
SECTION 05 11 00

STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: All labor, materials, equipment and operations required to complete structural and miscellaneous metals in shapes and configurations indicated; including:

1. Structural steel columns, beams, bracing, base plates, bolts, joist hangers, and stud bolts welded to structural steel.

2. Miscellaneous structural steel and connections; fabricated connectors and hangers installed by related sections.

3. Anchor bolts and steel inserts embedded in concrete or masonry, installed by related sections.

4. Fabricated steel items embedded in concrete or masonry installed by related sections.

5. Supervision of anchor bolt setting, leveling and elevations to insure required fit of steel work.

6. Shop priming and field touch-up, galvanizing.

7. Bracing, Shoring, Fabrication and Erection.

B. Related Sections:

1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Agency services.

2. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying concrete reinforcement, formwork, concrete, structural and miscellaneous metal fabrications, steel joists, metal decking, cold-formed metal framing, rough carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, latest adopted edition (herein noted as CBC): Chapter 22 Steel.

B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 303 “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”.

C. AISC 360 “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”.

D. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel”.

E. AWS D1.8 “Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement”.

F. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) “Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts”.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) FRD “Fire Resistance Directory”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 466 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 2 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, location and installation instructions for proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories.

Provide samples of these items upon request.

D. Shop drawings: Submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units of work in a submittal. Include all of the following;

1. Profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.

2. Fabrication tolerances for all steel.

3. Connections: All, including type and location of shop and field connections.

4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths, type, size, and sequence. Designate demand critical welds.

5. Designation of Seismic Force Resisting System (SFRS) members and connections. Locate and dimension protected zones. Brace frame gusset plates shall be drawn to scale.

6. Cross-reference all shop drawing detail references to contract document detail references.

7. Secure all field measurements as necessary to complete this work prior to submitting shop drawings for review.

8. Provide holes, welded studs, etc. as necessary to secure work of other sections.

9. Provide the following as separate submittals for each building or unit of work:
a. Bolt and anchor setting plans.
b. Layout, fabrication and erection drawings.

E. Certifications:

1. Steel Materials: Submit the following for identified materials. a. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis, and non-destructive test analysis.
c. Contractor's affidavit certifying that all identified steel materials provided are of the grades specified and match the certificates supplied.

2. High-Strength Bolting: Certify all materials provided are the grades specified.

3. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification per AWS D1.1.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 467 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 3 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
F. Samples: Provide samples to the Testing Agency as specified in Article SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL, at no additional costs.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 17.

B. All tests shall be performed by a recognized testing agency as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

C. Certification and Identification of Materials and Uses: Provide Testing Agency with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of steel. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection and all material identification/test information listed below.

1. Test all steel as required by ASTM A6.

2. Provide manufacturer's Mill Test Reports for all materials. Include chemical and physical properties of the material for each heat number manufactured. Tag all fabricated materials with heat number.

3. Provide letter certifying all materials supplied are from heat numbers covered by supplied mill certificates. Include in letter the physical location of each material type and/or heat number in the project (i.e. walls, braced frames etc.).

4. Unidentified Material Tests: Where identification of materials by heat number or mill tests cannot be made, Owner's Testing Agency shall test unidentified materials.

5. Provide all certification, verifications, and other test data required to substantiate specified material properties at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Testing and Inspection: Tests and Inspections performed by Independent Testing Agency are specified below in Articles SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. Duties and limitations of Independent Testing Agency, test costs and test reports in conformance with pertinent sections of Division 01.

E. The following standards are the minimum level of quality required. Provide higher quality work as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents.

1. Workmanship and details of structural steel work shall conform to the CBC and AISC 360.

2. The quality of materials and the fabrication of all welded connections shall conform to AWS D1.1.

3. Comply with Section 10 of AISC 303 for architecturally exposed structural steel.

F. The Testing Agency will review all submittals and testing of materials.

G. All re-inspections made necessary by non-conforming work shall be at the Contractor's expense.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 468 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 4 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
A. Deliver materials to project site in bundles marked with durable tags indicating heat number, mill, member size and length, proposed location in the structure and other information corresponding with markings shown on placement diagrams.

B. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination or accumulation of dirt or rust.

1.6 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Organize the work and employ shop and field crew(s) of sufficient size to minimize inspections by the Testing Agency.

B. Provide schedule and sequence information to Testing Agency in writing upon request. Update information as work progresses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel W Shapes: ASTM A992 Gr. 50 or ASTM A572 Gr. 50.

B. Structural Steel Plates: ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 Gr. 50 or ASTM 529 Gr. 50 C. Structural Steel Channels, Angles: ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 Gr. 50.

D. HSS (Hollow Structural Sections):

1. Round: ASTM A500, Gr. C.

2. Rectangular or Square: ASTM A500, Gr. C.

E. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 Grade A machine bolts with ASTM A563 Grade A nuts and ASTM F844 washers to match. See FINISHES section for galvanization, where required.

G. Anchor Bolts/Rods, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F1554 Gr. 36 or 55 with ASTM A563 Grade A nuts and ASTM F436 Type 1 washers. Grade DH nuts where Grade 105 rod is specified. No upset thread allowed.

H. Arc-Welding Electrodes: AWS Standards E70 or equivalent, except no E70T-4 allowed.

I. Other Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

J. Welded Headed/Threaded Studs: ASTM A108. Minimum yield strength is 51,000 pounds per square inch.

K. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. High Strength Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrink, premixed compound consisting of aggregate, cement, and water reducing plasticizing agents. Minimum

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 469 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 5 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
compressive strength f’c = 7000 psi at 28 days. Non-metallic where exposed to view. BASF “MasterFlow 928” or equivalent.

B. Building Structural Steel Primers: Comply with local VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction and the California Green Building Code. Verify compatibility with finish coats specified in other sections. Follow manufacturers printed instructions. Apply one coat unless otherwise directed.

1. Type A: Self-Crosslinking Hydrophobic Acrylic passing 2000 hours ASTM D4585 and 7000 hours ASTM D5894. “Series 115 Uni-Bond DF” by Tnemec (2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT).

2. Type B: Organic Zinc-Rich Urethane passing 50,000 hours ASTM B117 and 15000 hours ASTM G85. “Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc” by Tnemec (2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT) or “Series 94-H20 Hydro-Zinc” by Tnemec (2.5 to

3.5 mils DFT).

3. Type C: MIO-Zinc Filled Urethane passing 10,000 hours ASTM B117 and 5000 hours ASTM D4585. “Series 394 PerimePrime” by Tnemec (2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT).

C. Galvanizing: ASTM A153 and A123.

D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Type B primer.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind welds smooth where exposed to view and where noted on drawings.

C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

D. Protect all materials, before and after fabrication, from rust, corrosion, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter.

E. Fabricate framing members free from twists or bends. Form holes, cut and sheared edges neatly without kinks, burrs, or warped edges.

F. Exposed Steel: Straight, smooth, free of nicks, scars or dents.

G. Gas Cutting: Gas cutting of holes in a member shall not be permitted.

H. Splicing of members: Members requiring splicing due to length requirements may be spliced using full penetration butt welds when such welds and procedures are inspected and certified by the Testing Agency, in conformance with AWS and AISC standards. The location of splices shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer in writing prior to fabrication.

I. Welding: Welding of structural steel connections shall be performed by qualified welders in accordance with AWS Standards. All weld sizes shall match those shown on the drawings.

1. Preparation: Clean all surfaces free of rust, paint and all foreign matter.

Remove paint or scale by brushing, chipping or hammering as required.

Chip clean and wire brush burned or flame cut edges before welding.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 470 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 6 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
Space and alternate welds, clamping as necessary to prevent warp or misalignment.

2. Sequence Welding: When welds enclose, or partially enclose, the perimeter or portion of the surface of a member, make weld bead in sequence, or staggered. Minimize internal stresses. Weld groups of members occurring in a single line in staggered sequence to minimize distortion of the structural frame.

3. Faulty and Defective Welding: Welds failing to meet AWS standards and the Contract Documents shall be rejected and remade at Contractor expense. All welds showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, bad undercut or other defects, ascertained by visual or other means of inspection shall be removed and replaced with conforming work.

4. Minimum Weld Strengths: All welds shall match the minimum weld sizes recommended by AISC. Details of fabrication not specifically shown shall match similar details which are specifically shown. All bevel and groove welds shall be full penetration unless size is noted otherwise.

5. Threaded studs, headed studs, and deformed bar anchors shall be fullfusion welded conforming to ASW D1.1.

J. Grinding: Grind smooth the following structural steel and connections;

1. Exposed cut ends of structural and fabricated shapes.

2. All welds exposed to view.

3. Mitered and fit-up corners and intersections.

K. Back-Up Bars: Required for all complete penetration welds.

L. Bolt Holes: Edge, end distances and spacing shall conform to dimensions shown on the drawings, and as follows;

1. Round: Size indicated and 1/16 inch maximum oversize

2. Slotted: At locations specifically noted on the drawings, provide size indicated and 1/16 inch by 1/4 inch oversize slotted in direction perpendicular to applied loads.

3. Holes in base plates for anchor bolts may be 1/8 inch oversize.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Steel exposed to inclement atmospheric conditions or weather (such as coastal moisture or seasonal rain) shall be sufficiently primed or otherwise protected against corrosion. If condition of steel is suspect due to weathering/corrosion, Contractor shall bear cost of inspection to determine if excessive corrosion is present and if steel member(s) requires repair or replacement. Contractor shall bear cost of repair or replacement.

B. Prepare and finish structural and miscellaneous steel component surfaces as follows, unless a higher standard-of-care is determined necessary per item A:

1. Unpainted, interior, dry exposure surfaces need not be primed.

2. Finished painted, interior, dry exposure surfaces:
a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 Hand-Tool and/or SP3 PowerTool Cleaning. Apply Primer Type A. Field touchup with same primer.
b. Where jobsite exposure is expected to exceed 6 months, SSPCSP6 / NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast-Cleaning is required. Apply

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 471 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 7 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
Primer Type B or C. Field touchup with same primer.

3. Finish painted surfaces with exterior exposure, interior exposure subject to wet conditions or fumes, or surfaces to receive high performance finish coatings (for example epoxy or urethane coatings.
a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 / NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast-Cleaning to create a dense, uniform angular surface profile of 2.0 mils minimum. For severe (immersion) exposure, SSPCSP10 / NACE No. 2 Near-White Blast-Cleaning is required. b. Apply Primer Type B. Field touchup with same primer.

4. Surfaces to be fire proofed need not be primed unless required by the fireproofing manufacturer or if jobsite exposure is expected to be inclement per item A. Where unprimed steel is to receive fireproofing, prepare steel surface as required by fireproofing manufacturer. If fireproofed surfaces are to be primed, provide primer as follows:
a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP3 Power-Tool Cleaning.
b. Apply Primer Type C. Field touchup with same primer.

5. Exterior exposed (unpainted) surfaces and as otherwise indicated to receive galvanizing:
a. Galvanize per ASTM A123 Class 55 minimum. Passivation agents are not permitted on galvanized metal that is to be painted.

Provide vent holes per ASTM A385 at closed sections (such as HSS). Submit proposed location of vent holes for review by Engineer.
b. Connection hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153 or F2329. Mating bolts and nuts shall receive the same zinccoating process. c. Repair all uncoated, damaged, or altered galvanized surfaces per ASTM A780.

C. Do not prime the following surfaces unless otherwise indicated:

1. Connections to be field welded.

2. Steel in contact with concrete.

3. Surfaces to receive welded metal decking.

D. Slip critical bolted connection surfaces shall either be unfinished & prepared per the RCSC or primed per item B3 or B4.

E. Do not cover up work with finish materials until inspection is complete and work is approved by the Testing Agency.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent Testing Agency will perform source quality control tests and submit reports, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

B. Steel Materials Testing:

1. No testing is required for materials identified in accordance with CBC 2203.1 (heat number, grade stencil, etc.).

2. Unidentified steel- General: Test all structural shapes. In addition, test to verify Fy and Fu values when engineering requirements exceed Fy = 25 ksi for design.

3. Charpy V-Notch (CVN) testing requirements are per AISC 341. Heavy sections requiring CVN testing are indicated on the documents.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 472 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 8 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
C. Shop Welding Inspection:

1. Testing Agency shall inspect and certify all structural welds, unless the fabricating shop has been accredited in conformance with CBC requirements. Submit certification to the Architect/Engineer for review and the Building Official for approval.

2. Welder Qualifications: Welding inspector shall verify that all the welders are properly qualified prior to steel fabrication and state the qualifications of each welder in the welding inspection report.

3. Welding Inspection: Continuous inspection required unless otherwise noted below. Comply with requirements of AWS D1.1.
a. Welding Inspector shall check all welds, materials, equipment and procedures.
b. Welding Inspector shall provide reports certifying the welding is as required and has been done in conformity with the plans, specifications and codes.
c. Welding Inspector shall use radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or any other necessary aid to visual inspection to assure adequacy of welds.

4. Periodic Inspection Acceptable:
a. Single pass fillet welds not exceeding 5/16 inch.

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Provide samples to Testing Agency for required testing, at no additional cost.

E. High Strength Bolted Connections: Provide testing and verification of shopbolted connections in accordance with RCSC specifications. Test all bolts at each connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.

B. Framing:

1. Erect all structural steel true and plumb.

2. Verify proper final alignment prior to making final connections.

C. Field Connections:

1. Workmanship of field bolted and welded connections shall conform in all respects to methods and tolerances specified for fabrication.

2. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. Sequence field welds to minimize built-up stress and distortion of the structural frame.

Verify sequence with Engineer. Coordinate field welding schedule with Testing Laboratory.

3. Welded Studs: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 473 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 9 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
structural welding code AWS D1.1.

D. Templates: Provide bolt setting templates for all anchor bolts. Provide instructions for the setting of anchors and bearing plates, verify these items are set correctly as work progresses.

E. Column base plates: Set level to correct elevations, support temporarily on steel wedges, shims, or leveling nuts where shown, until the supported members are plumbed and base plate is grouted.

1. Grout solid the full bearing area under base plates prior to installation of floor and/or roof decks.

2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for high strength grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

F. Bolting - General:

1. Inspect mating surfaces to insure that bolt head and nut will have full bearing and that metal plies will mate flush between bolts.

2. Install bolts in matching holes. Do not distort metal or enlarge holes by drifting during assembly. Remake mismatched components to achieve tolerances indicated.

3. Holes mismatched in excess of 1/8 inch will be rejected.

4. Holes mismatched less than 1/8 inch may be reamed to the next larger size bolt.

5. Do not enlarge holes by flame cutting or air/arc (“plasma“) cutting.

6. Provide flat washer(s) at over-size holes.

7. Provide washers for all conditions per RCSC Section 6 and under nuts to connected parts less than ¼ inch thick.

8. Provide ASTM F436 beveled washers when the slope of the surfaces of parts in contact with the bolt head or nut is greater than 1:20.

9. Do not install bolts with damaged threads.

10. Threads shall commence outside of the shear plane.

G. Bolting - Specific:

1. Machine Bolts (MB): Install and tighten to a snug condition (ST) such that laminated surfaces bear fully on one another, using an impact wrench or “full effort” of an installer using a standard spud wrench.

2. High Strength Bolts in Bearing/Shear or Static Tension joints snug tight (ST):
a. Provide a hardened washer at the head/nut at slotted holes b. Install and tighten as per Machine Bolts (MB) snug tight (ST) and other requirements of RCSC specification Section 8.
c. Use ASTM F436 washer only in snug tight connections with static tension loads.

3. High Strength Bolts in Pretensioned joints (PT):
a. Provide ASTM F436 washer per requirements of RCSC Section 6. b. Install and tighten in accordance with the requirements of RCSC Section 8.
c. Install bolts in all holes of the joint and compact the joint until the connected plies are in firm contact prior to pretensioning. d. The following tightening methods and bolt type are acceptable for PT joints:
(a) Turn-of-the-nut pretensioning method

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 474 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 10 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
(b) Calibrated wrench pretensioning method
(c) Twist-off-type tension-control bolts
(d) Direct-tension-indicator washer pretensioning method.

4. High Strength Bolts in Slip Critical (SC) joints:
a. Provide tensioning for High Strength Bolts (PT) per above. b. Faying surfaces to be prepared per RCSC Section 3 and PART 2 H. Supports, Shoring and Bracing: Allow for erection loads and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

Conform to requirements of all applicable laws and governing safety regulations.

Resist imposed loads, including those of stored materials and equipment.

1. Provide all temporary supports, shoring and bracing necessary to achieve work of tolerances indicated.

2. Provide all necessary temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding required for erection of steel, and support of erection machinery.

3. Construction Loading: Do not overload the structure or temporary supports with stored materials, equipment or other loads.

4. Maintain temporary bracing and shoring until work is complete, and longer as required to ensure stability and safety of structure.

I. Do not make final connections until structure is aligned to meet specified tolerances.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The independent Testing Agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

B. Field Welding Inspection: Conform to all requirements of section SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL.

1. Inspect mating surfaces.

2. Test all materials prior to use. Use only materials meeting specified requirements.

C. High Strength Bolting: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC Section 9.

1. Inspect mating surfaces.

2. Test all materials prior to use. Use only materials meeting specified requirements.

3. Inspector shall review installation and verify “full effort” with installers for ST joints and shall randomly manually verify “full effort” on 10 percent of installed bolts.

4. Inspector shall verify installation for 100% of SC and PT joints.

5. Review installation procedures for all types of HSB joints and verify installation of “Twist-off” and load-indicator type bolts.

6. If any bolt fails testing, all bolts at the joint shall be loosened and retightened. Exception: Galvanized bolts shall be replaced prior to retesting.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 475 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 11 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-up damaged finishes with compatible specified primer.

B. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work. Replace all defective work at Contractor's expense.

C. Straighten materials by means that will not injure the materials.

D. Replace defective or damaged work which cannot be corrected in the field with new work, or return defective items to the shop for repair.

E. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of damaged, defective, or missing work.

F. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer's costs for (re-)design and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

G. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection; leave free of grime and dirt.

Remove unused materials, tools, equipment and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

B. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 476 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 11 00 - 12 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
BLANK

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 477 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 50 00 - 1 Metal Fabrications
SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide stock and custom fabricated metal items scheduled at end of this Section, complete in respect to function as intended.

1. Metal fabrications includes items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes, and castings which are not a part of structural steel or metal systems specified elsewhere.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 51 00: Metal stairs and stair railings.

2. Section 05 70 00: Decorative stainless steel countertops and base.

3. Section 05 75 00: Fire poles.

4. Section 32 31 20: Decorative metal fences and gates.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Pipe Rail Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Railing Design/Build: Provide special engineering for railings to ensure railings comply with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for products used in metal fabrications, including paint, grout, and manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection, reinforcing and anchorage.

1. Provide templates for anchorage installation by others.

C. Railing Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide stock and custom fabricated metal items.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 478 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 50 00 - 2 Metal Fabrications
B. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; of grade required for design loading.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S seamless, grade as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; minimum standard weight, STD or Schedule 40.

E. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed.

F. Castings: Gray iron, ASTM A48, Class 30; malleable iron, ASTM A47.

G. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153.

H. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

I. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinccoated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

J. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

K. Paint:

1. Interior Metal Fabrications: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

2. Exterior Metal Fabrications: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating.

3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

B. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

C. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

D. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 479 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 50 00 - 3 Metal Fabrications
E. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.

1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

F. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication.

G. Railings: Comply with California and ADA Standards access requirements and NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual"; welded construction; cap exposed ends.

1. Railing Design Requirements: Design railings to support a lateral force of 50 lbs. /lin. ft. uniform load and 200 lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935.
a. Top Rails: Design to support minimum 300 lb. concentrated single point load applied at any point vertically or horizontally.

2. Regulatory Requirements:
a. Access: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for access for persons with disabilities. b. Code: Comply with requirements of applicable codes for railing design, except where more restrictive codes are specified.

3. Handrails: Seamless steel tube rails, 1-1/2" outside diameter, continuous railings conforming to applicable code and design requirements.

4. Wall Rail Brackets: Castings as approved by Architect.

5. Wall Returns: 90° elbow return with 1/4" maximum clearance unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wall plates only where indicated and where required by applicable codes.

H. Pre-Engineered Support Systems: Provide manufactured pre-engineered support system consisting of channel supports with anchors, attachments, and accessories as required for complete installation. Sizes to support anticipated loads.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Unistrut Inc./Unistrut.
b. Grinnell Corp./PowerStrut.
c. Thomas & Betts, Inc./Superstrut.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime paint finish for channel supports; galvanized or similar plated anchors and fasteners; hot dip galvanized where at exterior and exterior exposed applications.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 480 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 50 00 - 4 Metal Fabrications
I. Finishes: Galvanize and prime paint exterior work and prime paint interior work unless otherwise noted in Schedule.

1. Interior Paint: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for preparation and priming of interior metal fabrications.

2. Exterior Paint: Comply with requirements of Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating for preparation and priming of exterior metal fabrications.

3. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

4. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

5. Galvanized Coating: Provide coating comparable to ASTM A924 and A653, minimum G90 hot dip galvanized coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.

3.2 ERECTION
A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting and adjusting which are not part of scheduled work.

1. Perform cutting and altering for installation and coordination with other work.

B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

1. Supply items required to be cast into or embedded in other materials to appropriate trades.

2. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation.

C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

D. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable.

F. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 481 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 50 00 - 5 Metal Fabrications

3.3 SCHEDULE
A. Supply and install metal fabrications listed in Schedule, complete with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation.

1. Schedule lists principal items only, refer to Drawings for items not listed.

B. Schedule:

1. Miscellaneous angles, plates, and attachments to be set in concrete or masonry for anchorage of other items.

2. Iron and steel shapes, sleeves, anchors, connectors, and fastenings required to complete construction work, and which are not provided in other Specification sections.
a. Rough hardware, including bolts, fabricated plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and miscellaneous metals.
b. Ledge and shelf angles, channels, and plates not attached to structural steel, and for support of metal decking.
c. Angle and channel frames for doors and wall openings. d. Beams of structural shapes not supported by structural steel. e. Steel angle corner guards.
f. Elevator sill support angles, and metal fabrications sized on Architectural Drawings not typically provided as part of structural work.

3. Guard rails and handrails, other than stair railings.

4. Pre-engineered support systems.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 482 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 51 00 - 1 Metal Stairs
SECTION 05 51 00

METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide steel stairs and landings, with stair handrails, and including plates, angles, hangers, and struts for securing to building structure.

1. Provide additional steel as required for support of stairs and not otherwise indicated on Architectural or Structural Drawings.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 05 50 00: Metal handrails other than steel stair rails.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering for stairs and railings to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. Metal Stairs Manual.

2. Pipe Rail Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for products used in stair and rail fabrications, including paint, grout, and rail brackets.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and erection of stairs and handrails. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection, reinforcing, and anchorage.

1. Provide templates for anchorage installation by others.

C. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years successful experience fabricating custom stairs for projects of similar size and scope.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 483 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 51 00 - 2 Metal Stairs
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide steel stairs and landings, with stair handrails, and including plates, angles, hangers and struts for securing to building structure.

B. Regulatory Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of applicable codes for stair and railing design, except where more restrictive codes are specified.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Access: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

E. Design Requirements: Design stairs and railings to support following minimum loads.

1. Stairs: 100-psf loads, with individual stair treads designed to support a 300-pound concentrated load placed in a position which would cause maximum stress.

2. Railings: Support a lateral force of 50 lbs./lin. ft. uniform load and 200-lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935. a. Top Rails: Design to support minimum 300-lb. concentrated single point load applied at any point vertically or horizontally.

F. Steel Sections, Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

G. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; or grade required for design loading.

H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S seamless, grade as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; minimum standard weight, STD or Schedule 40.

I. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed.

J. Castings: Gray iron, ASTM A48, Class 30; malleable iron, ASTM A47.

K. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153.

L. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

M. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinccoated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 484 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 51 00 - 3 Metal Stairs
N. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

O. Paint:

1. Interior Metal Pan Stairs: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

2. Exterior Checker Plate Metal Stairs: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating.

3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Stairs: Comply with requirements of NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual", including components required for proper anchorage of metal stairs.

1. Types of Stairs: Refer to Drawings.

2. Stair Class: NAAMM Architectural Class.

3. Pan Stairs and Landings: Fabricate stairs with landings and treads of pan construction with treads, landings and risers from sheet stock. a. Secure tread pans to stringers with clip angles welded in place. b. Provide minimum 3000 psi concrete fill for treads and landings, with non-slip fused aluminum oxide or crushed emery finish.

4. Checker Plate Stairs and Landings: Form treads and landings of minimum 3/16" thick formed non-slip checkered steel floor plate, form risers of minimum 14 gage sheet stock.

5. Metal Stairs: Provide with abrasive nosing, 2" wide, contrasting color to tread.

B. Stair Railings: As indicated and as required by applicable codes and standards; comply with NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual"; welded construction; cap exposed ends.

1. Handrail: Seamless steel tube, 1-1/2" outside diameter, continuous railings conforming to applicable code and design requirements.

2. Wall Rail Brackets: Castings as approved by Architect.

3. Wall Returns: 90° elbow return with 1/4" maximum clearance unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wall plates only where indicated and where required by applicable codes.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 485 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 51 00 - 4 Metal Stairs
C. Fabricate stairs, landings, and component connections to support live loads specified.

1. Provide closed riser stairs with nosing joined flush to riser.

2. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/240.

3. Stringers: As indicated on Drawings; Contractor option where not otherwise indicated.

4. Reinforce underside of landings.
a. Concrete Fill Landings: Provide smooth soffit surfaces unless suspended finish is indicated below landing.

D. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

E. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

G. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery.

H. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.

1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

I. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal stairs.

J. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal stairs and rails.

K. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

L. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication.

M. Finishes: Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to applying finish. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

1. Interior Stairs and Rails: Prime paint.

2. Exterior Stairs and Rails: Hot dip galvanize and prime paint. a. Provide minimum ASTM A123 or A924 and A653 G90 galvanized coating; iron and steel hardware galvanized conforming to ASTM A153.

3. Interior Paint: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for preparation and priming of interior metal fabrications.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 486 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 51 00 - 5 Metal Stairs

4. Exterior Paint: Comply with requirements of Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating for preparation and priming of exterior metal fabrications.

5. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

6. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

7. Galvanized Coating: Provide coating comparable to ASTM A924 and A653, minimum G90 hot dip galvanized coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.

1. Verify clearances, including code required head height clearances.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting and adjusting not part of scheduled work.

1. Perform necessary cutting and altering for installation of work of other sections.

B. Install steel stairs and railings square and level, plumb and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

D. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation.

E. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable.

G. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 487 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 70 00 - 1 Decorative Metal
SECTION 05 70 00

DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide decorative (ornamental) metal items including attachment devices and accessories, as required for complete, finished installation.

1. Provide custom stainless-steel base.

2. Provide custom stainless-steel countertops.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 05 50 00: Metal fabrications including steel railings.

2. Section 05 51 00: Steel railings at stairs.

3. Section 05 75 00: Fire poles.

4. Section 14 42 10: Decorative metal at LU LA lifts.

5. Section 32 31 20: Decorative metal fences and gates.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers: Metal Finishes Manual.

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): BHMA 1301/ ANSI A156.18 Standard for Materials and Finishes.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature including recommendations for cleaning.

B. Shop Drawings: Show detailing including anchorage, accessories, and supporting members.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed metal finish.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating decorative metal items like those required for Project.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 488 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 70 00 - 2 Decorative Metal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide decorative (ornamental) metal items specified including attachment devices and accessories.

B. Design Requirements, General: Drawings indicate decorative metal sizes and shapes; unless otherwise specifically indicated, design components and fabrications of gages and thicknesses to withstand anticipated loads.

1. Cladding: Where permitted, cladding to be minimum 0.025" thick unless otherwise approved in advance.

C. Stainless-Steel: Type 304 stainless steel.

1. Materials: Comply with following standards for stainless-steel. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM A666.
b. Bar Stock: ASTM A666 or A276.
c. Shapes: ASTM A276.
d. Seamless Tubing: ASTM A269.
e. Castings: ASTM A743, iron-chromium-nickel alloy.

2. Finish: BHMA 630 (US32D) or NAAMM Number 4, satin directional polished stainless-steel.

D. Brackets and Anchors: Unexposed plates, angles and supports may be steel; exposed items to match decorative metal type and finish.

E. Fasteners: Type required for specific usage; provide concealed fasteners except where specifically approved. Where exposed match type and finish of metal being fastened.

1. Concealed Steel Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized minimum G90 where built into exterior walls or subject to high humidity.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Stainless Steel Base and Countertops with Integral Backsplashes: Not less than 16- gage, with No. 4 satin directional polish finish.

1. Fabricate to furniture quality construction, assembled, and welded in manner consistent with recognized steel furniture standards; grind joints smooth and flush and finish to match adjacent finish on exposed surfaces.

2. Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts where more than one-piece countertops are required.
a. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

3. Fabricate corners, joints, and finish such that no gaps, spaces, cavities, crevices, or inaccessible spaces or areas are present in which dirt, dust, debris, or moisture can accumulate.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 489 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 70 00 - 3 Decorative Metal

4. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures, and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

5. Sound Deadening: Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesion to metal in 1/8" thick coating.
a. Apply coating of sound deadening material to underside of tops, drainboards, and sinks.

B. Fabricate component connections to support specified design loads.

C. Select materials for straightness, free of defects and irregularities.

1. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil canning," stains, discolorations, and imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

D. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened; provide concealed connection devices with hidden fasteners.

1. Fabricate continuous items with joints neatly fitted and secured.

2. Ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

E. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding each type of material; provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration on exposed side; dress exposed and contact surfaces.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

G. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery.

H. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install decorative metal items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

B. Install plumb, true and in correct relation to adjacent work, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 490 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 70 00 - 4 Decorative Metal
C. Prior to securing continuous items, adjust to ensure proper matching at butt joints and correct alignment throughout their length.

D. Tolerances: Accurately align and locate components to column lines and floor levels; adjust work to conform to following tolerances.

1. Plumb: 1/8" in 10'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

2. Level: 1/8" in 20'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

3. Alignment: Limit offset to 1/16" where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2" out of flush and separated by less than 2" (by reveal or protruding work); otherwise limit offsets to 1/8".

4. Location: 3/8" maximum deviation from measured theoretical location (any member, and location).

E. Install anchorage devices to secure and rigidly fasten system to building.

F. Provide anchors to be installed in other work, and setting details, in time for proper installation by trades concerned; verify correct placement.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean decorative metal surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Remove excess sealant compounds, dirt, and other foreign substances.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Repair or replace items damaged or marred during construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 491 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 75 00 - 1 Fire Poles
SECTION 05 75 00

FIRE POLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manufactured metal fire poles and enclosures including landing mats, attachment devices, and accessories required for complete, finished installation.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature including recommendations for cleaning.

B. Shop Drawings: Show detailing including anchorage and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. McIntire Brass Works, Inc.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide manufactured metal fire poles including landing mats, attachment devices, and accessories.

B. Fire Poles: Provide manufacturer’s standard fire pole construction for applications where fire pole has enclosure to prevent accidental falls through floor opening.

1. Type: McIntire Brass Works, Inc./Model 20 Stationary Pole and Enclosure.

2. Diameter: Manufacturer’s standard, nominal 3” diameter with 0.25” wall thickness.

3. Brass: ASTM B135 seamless brass tubing with bright brass or mirror polish finish.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 492 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 75 00 - 2 Fire Poles
C. Landing Mat: Manufacturer’s standard 32” diameter, 2” thick closed cell black neoprene landing mat with brass floor landing mat ring.

D. Floor Trim Assembly: Provide complete floor trim assembly including bronze floor trim ring, bronze ceiling trim ring, and stainless-steel filler sheet to provide closure between floor and ceiling trim.

1. Floor trim assembly to provide smooth surfaces free of burrs, corners, and edges that could snag clothing and that could injure individuals passing through floor opening around fire poles.

E. Safety Kit: Provide complete safety kit for fire pole including but not necessarily limited to following.

1. Stanchions: Manufacturer’s standard chrome stanchions.

2. Mesh Guards: Manufacturer’s standard 14-ga. stainless-steel mesh guards.

3. Handrail: Manufacturer’s standard chromed cast bronze handrail and lock-out.

4. Gate: Manufacturer’s standard chromed cast bronze self-closing gate.

F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27.

1. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153.

G. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

H. Brackets and Anchors: Unexposed plates, angles and supports may be steel; exposed items to match ornamental metal type and finish.

I. Fasteners: Type required for specific usage; provide concealed fasteners except where specifically approved. Where exposed match type and finish of metal being fastened.

1. Concealed Steel Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized minimum G90 where built into exterior walls or subject to high humidity.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate component connections to support anticipated loads.

B. Select materials for straightness, free of defects and irregularities.

1. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil canning," stains, discolorations, and imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

C. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened; provide concealed connection devices with hidden fasteners.

1. Fabricate continuous items with joints neatly fitted and secured.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 493 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
05 75 00 - 3 Fire Poles

2. Ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

D. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery.

E. Separate dissimilar materials with shop applied bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire poles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

B. Install plumb, true and in correct relation to adjacent work, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

C. Prior to securing continuous items, adjust to ensure proper matching at butt joints and correct alignment throughout their length.

D. Install sufficient anchorage devices to secure and rigidly fasten system to building.

E. Provide anchors to be installed in other work, and setting details, in time for proper installation by trades concerned; verify correct placement.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Remove dirt and other foreign substances.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Repair or replace items damaged or marred during construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 494 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 1 Rough Carpentry
SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment and all operations required to complete all rough carpentry and structural framing as indicated on the drawings; to produce shapes and configurations as shown, as required; and as specified herein, including:

1. Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.

2. Floor, wall, and roof sheathing.

3. Rough hardware, framing connectors and fasteners.

4. Treatment of wood.

5. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, and other work requiring supporting blocking.

6. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips, including roof applications, other wood framing, furring, shims or blocking as required to complete the work.

B. Related Sections:

1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Agency services.

2. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Structural Product Requirements: Structural Product Options, Substitution procedures and limitations, transportation, handling and storage.

3. Pertinent sections of Division 03 specifying wood formwork construction and/or setting anchors in concrete.

4. Pertinent section of Division 06 specifying wood construction and materials.

5. Pertinent sections of other divisions specifying steel or concrete construction.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, latest adopted edition (herein noted as CBC): Chapter 23 Wood.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / American Wood Council (AWC) “NDS - National Design Specification for Wood Construction”.

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) / Engineered Wood Association (APA) “PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Structural Plywood”.

D. NIST / APA “PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels”.

E. NIST “PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard”.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 495 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 2 Rough Carpentry
F. Redwood Inspection Bureau (RIS) “Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber”.

G. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) “Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17”.

H. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) “Western Lumber Grading Rules”.

I. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) “Book of Standards”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. Submit for review prior to fabrication. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.

1. Substitutions for products specified require conformance to substitution requirements in Division 01.

2. Review of materials and hardware for substitution to products specified is at the additional expense of the Contractor.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, and installation instructions for & location of framing connectors, wood preservative materials, application instructions, and fasteners. Include complete, accurate equivalence data when submitting alternate products to those specified. Provide samples of these items upon request.

2. Submit product data and current ICC-ES report for machine-driven nails, fasteners, and equipment, including dimensions of all fasteners, including head, shank diameter and length.

3. Submit samples of each and every type and size of proposed machinedriven nails and fasteners.

D. Shop drawings: For manufactured wood products, submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units of work in a submittal. Include all of the following;

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, and spacing locations of structural members.

2. Cross-reference all shop drawing detail references to contract document detail references.

3. Secure all field measurements as necessary to complete this work.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit all certifications of physical and chemical properties of materials as specified below in Article titled QUALITY ASSURANCE.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 496 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 3 Rough Carpentry

1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements, including specified moisture content.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 17.

B. All tests shall be performed by a recognized testing agency as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

C. Inspection of fabricators is required per CBC 1704.2 unless fabricator is registered and approved by the building official. Wood product quality standards:

1. All wood products to comply with article REFERENCES.

2. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and sheathing with type, grade, mill, and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.

3. Sheathing panels to be marked by APA (The Engineered Wood Association).

D. End-Jointed lumber shall not be used.

E. Hardware and engineered wood products shall have current ICC ES Evaluation/research reports that are equivalent to products specified.

F. Employ competent workers experienced in work of the types specified and required.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent requirements of Division 01.

B. Delivery: Time delivery and installation of carpentry products to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by this section and to comply with moisture content, protection and storage requirements.

C. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and sheathing panels to prevent deformation and provide air circulation within stacks.

1. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained.

2. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination, or accumulation of dirt or foreign materials.

3. Provide special protection for horizontal sheathing panels. Deformation of panels due to moisture is not acceptable.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Verify all conditions at project site affecting the work; work to field dimensions as required. Coordinate carpentry installation with size, location, and installation of service utilities.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 497 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 4 Rough Carpentry
B. Sequence rough carpentry installation activities to allow sufficient time for:

1. Review of all submittals, including machine-driven nail sample submittals.

2. Indicate submittal review, procurement, and testing activities in the project schedule prior to the start of installation. Installation durations shall be based on hand-nailed installation methods specified.

3. Attainment of specified maximum lumber moisture content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONED LUMBER
A. General

1. Size per industry standards for nominal sizes shown; S4S (sanded four sides).

2. Warped/twisted and excessively checked members shall not be used regardless of grade marks.

3. At the Contractor’s option, engineered lumber of equivalent size and material properties may be substituted for solid sawn lumber where material is difficult to source due to length, availability, etc. Submit proposed substitution to Engineer for review prior to purchasing materials.

B. Moisture content of framing:

1. All lumber to be maximum 19% at time of fastener installation, except 3x and 4x studs may be 25% at time of sheathing panel nailing. All lumber to be maximum 19% at time of close-in, unless noted otherwise.

2. The Owner’s Testing Laboratory will test for moisture content prior to commencement of close-in.

3. The Contractor shall recognize that excessive shrinkage of lumber results from excess moisture content at the time of installation. The Contractor will compensate for use of such lumber by waiting for acceptable moisture content before close in and/or by replacing/repairing lumber that has sagged, twisted, or warped prior to close in.

4. Deviation from this specification would require structural redesign of connections and fasteners.

C. Sills/ledgers on concrete or masonry: No. 2 pressure treated Douglas Fir and as called for on the drawings.

D. Interior structural framing shall be Douglas Fir (D.F.) with grades as noted below, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. All grades are per WCLIB standard grading rules.

1. All permanently exposed (interior or protected from weather) framing shall be select structural grade with no box heart.

2. Except per 1 above, unless noted otherwise, minimum grades are:
a. Floor/roof joists/rafters (2x) and 2x8 & larger studs: D.F. No. 2 b. 2x4 and 2x6 studs and plates: D.F. No. 2
c. 4x and larger: D.F. No. 1
d. Blocking: D.F. No. 2

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 498 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 5 Rough Carpentry
e. 6x8 and larger posts and beams may be SGL/CGL per below unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

E. Exterior structural framing (exposed to weather) shall be redwood select structural grade or pressure treated D.F. No. 1, unless noted otherwise.

F. Structural decking shall be D.F. select decking or White Pine select where not exposed to moisture. Where directly exposed to moisture or high humidity for prolonged periods of time, decking shall be Alaskan Yellow Cedar or Port Orford Cedar. Moisture content at time of installation to be less than 12%.

G. Framing not otherwise shown or specified: Douglas Fir construction grade per WCLIB paragraphs applicable to uses and sizes required.

2.2 MANUFACTURED LUMBER
A. Structural (Certified) Glued Lumber (SGL): SGL shall be manufactured following the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) "Glued Lumber Policy" and meet the requirements of Voluntary Product Standard PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard". Grading shall be per the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) or Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). SGL shall be manufactured with waterproof adhesive. "Stud use only" SGL is not permitted.

1. Acceptable products:
a. “RMT” by Rosboro.
b. Approved equal.

2. Where specified for use on plan, SGL shall be entirely Douglas Fir lumber. SGL shall be grademarked to match the grade as would be specified for solid sawn lumber in the same location/use.

3. At the contractor's option, SGL may be substituted for solid sawn lumber.

SGL species and grade shall match that for the solid sawn member. SGL shall not be substituted for glued-laminated (glulam) members.

B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): for use as joists, beams, blocking, or studs when so noted on the drawings. Conform to ICC AC 47. Minimum Fb = 2,600 PSI. Minimum E=2,000,000 PSI. Acceptable products:

1. “Microllam LVL” by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-1387

2. “Redlam LVL” by RedBuilt, ICC ESR-2993

3. Approved equal
C. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL): for use as blocking (flat or vertical) or rim joist when used with I-joist or LVL, when so noted on the drawings. Conform to ICC AC 124. Minimum Fb = 1,700 PSI. Minimum E=1,300,000 PSI. Acceptable products:

1. “Timberstrand LSL” by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-1387

2. “Redlam LSL” by Redbuilt, ICC ESR-1387

3. Approved equal
D. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): for use as beams and posts when so noted on the drawings. Conform to ICC AC 47. Minimum material properties for beams: E = 2,000,000 psi; Fb = 2,900 psi; Fc = 2,900 psi (parallel); Fv = 290 psi. Minimum

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 499 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 6 Rough Carpentry
material properties for posts: E = 1,800,000 psi; Fb = 2,400 psi; Fc = 2,500 psi (parallel); Fv = 190 psi. Acceptable products:

1. “Parallam PSL” by Trus Joist, ICC ESR-1387

2. Approved equal

2.3 MANUFACTURED STRUCTURAL PANELS
A. Plywood: Structural sheathing shall conform to product standard PS-1 or PS-2.

All panels shall have an exterior exposure rating and bear the trademark of the Engineering Wood Association (APA) or other qualified agency. Grades shall be as required on the drawings.

B. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): All structural OSB shall be grade marked by a qualified agency for conformance with Product Standard PS-2 and shall be fabricated with exterior glue. Grades shall be as required on the drawings.

2.4 TREATED WOOD:

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA Standard U1. See Standard U1 for “Use Category” designations. Do not provide higher Use Category lumber than that specified. Maximum moisture content shall be the same as required for “dimensioned lumber” as specified above.

B. Preservative Treated Lumber

1. General
a. Preservatives shall be waterborne. Preservative retention rate shall be as required per AWPA Standards U1 & T1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir No. 2 (or better). Cut faces of treated wood shall be brush treated (two complete applications) prior to installation. b. Lumber less than 8 inches above grade and lumber less than 6 inches above exterior hard-surface flatwork shall be treated. c. Each piece of wood shall be stamped by the wood preservative applicator to identify its treatment and preservative retention.

2. Lumber at interior, non-weather exposed locations installed adjacent to concrete or masonry shall be Use Category UC2. Examples include sill plates & ledgers and lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or water proofing.

3. Lumber at exterior locations, not in contact with soil/ground, shall be Use Category UC3B. Examples include Douglas Fir decking and deck framing.

4. Lumber in contact with soil/ground shall be Use Category UC4A.

Examples include timber retaining walls.

5. Poles, posts, and sheathing panels shall be treated as recommended by AWPA Standard U1 per use and exposure.

6. Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of field-applied preservative shall meet local air quality standards and the California Green Building Code. Provide either of the following:
a. Copper Azole (CA-B) per ICC-ES AC143.
b. Alkaline/Copper/Quaternary (ACQ).

C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Product and application process must be recommended by manufacturer of treatment as being suitable for painting.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 500 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 7 Rough Carpentry
Application shall be by a California State Fire Marshal approved licensed contractor.

1. Exterior Type: Use Category UCFB, chemically treated, and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.
a. Treat exposed exterior rough carpentry items, including stairways, balconies, and covered walkways.
b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

2. Interior Type: Use Category UCFA, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated, and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.
a. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.
b. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.

2.5 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General requirements for fasteners:

1. Fasteners shall be of adequate size, spacing, and number to resist design loads under intended use, and types shall be appropriate for the materials or conditions for which used.

2. Provide washers, pre-drilling, etc. as required for proper installation and to prevent damage to framing.

3. Fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanized (ASTM A153), mechanically galvanized (ASTM B695 class 55 minimum), stainless steel (type 303, 304, 305, or 316), silicon bronze, or copper by approved methods for the following applications:
a. Exterior, exposed use.
b. In contact with preservative or fire-retardant treated wood.

4. Fasteners in moist corrosive atmosphere to be of stainless steel (type 303, 304, 305, or 316).

5. Where the retention level of ACQ or MCQ preservative is greater than

0.40 pcf, CBA-A preservative is greater than 0.41 pcf, or CA-B preservative is greater than 0.21 pcf, provide stainless steel fasteners (type 303, 304, 305, or 316).

6. All fasteners specified by manufacturer shall be installed in framing hardware, unless noted otherwise.

B. Nails and nailing not otherwise shown or specified:

1. Comply with requirements of governing building code.

2. For securing materials to hardened concrete or masonry provide hardened steel masonry nails or Simpson Strong-Tie “Titen” screws.

3. For framing and general woodwork: Common bright wire nails (not box nails) per ASTM F1667. 16d cement coated sinker nails may be used in lieu of common nails for framing, where noted on the drawings.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 501 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 8 Rough Carpentry

4. Nails for sheathing panels shall be of common wire with full round heads and shall be of sufficient length to fully develop the nails.

5. Machine-driven nails of all types must comply with the requirements of this section. All proposed nails shall match diameter and penetration of specified nails.

6. Staples shall conform to length and gauges specified and shall be installed to match specified patterns and spacing.

7. Powder-Driven Pins (PDP): Use only as approved by the Architect/Engineer; operators shall be qualified.

C. Bolts: Malleable iron washers or steel plate washers, unless otherwise shown, shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

1. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307 and ANSI/ASME B18.2.1, standard semifinished machine bolts as shown or required. Nuts shall be standard size unless noted otherwise and shall be per ASTM A563.

2. Anchor bolts or threaded rod anchors shall conform to ASTM F1554, ASTM A307, or ASTM A36. Anchor bolts shall be headed or end in two nuts tightened against one another, unless noted otherwise. Provide embedded plate washer as indicated on drawings. No upset threads allowed. No L or J bolts allowed.

D. Lag screws: Standard hex lag screws per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.

E. Wood screws: Standard wood screws per ANSI/ASME B18.6.1.

F. Powder-Driven Pins (PDP): Hilti X-CP72, ICC ESR-2379; Simpson PDPWL-300 MG, ICC ESR-2138.

G. Framing hardware: Fabricated sheet metal timber framing connectors shall be manufactured from painted or galvanized G90 steel by Simpson Strong-Tie (connectors specified on drawings are per Simpson Strong Tie, USP Lumber Connectors, or approved equivalent. Connectors shall be at least 16 gauge material, (1/8 inch plate materials where welded), unless otherwise noted, punched for nailing. All heavy hardware to be fabricated from A36 steel per Division 05, Metals. All hardware intended for exterior exposed use shall be galvanized per G185 ASTM A653 or stainless steel.

1. For contact with preservative or fire-retardant treated wood, provide minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A653.

2. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions with a nail provided for each punched hole. Nails to be used with framing accessories are subject to the requirements specified in this Section for fasteners and anchors.

H. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed conforming to APA Standard AFG-01 or ASTM D3498. Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) shall meet local air quality standards and the California Green Building Code.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform testing for moisture content of all lumber at time of fastener installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 502 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 9 Rough Carpentry
B. The Testing Agency will submit reports as specified in Division 01.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. General

1. Refer to drawings for layouts, notes and details, provide framing as required; comply with governing building code requirements.

2. Provide framing to achieve true alignments as surfaces receiving finish materials.

3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and install all wood blocking, furring strips, or grounds detailed or required to provide anchorage for all finishes, accessories, fixtures, etc. as required to complete all work. All blocking and/or backing shall be securely bolted or otherwise anchored in place.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for layout of anchor bolts, and other hardware embedded in concrete when placed by other trades.

5. Provide and install all structural framing, blocking, fasteners, brackets, clips, etc. as required to complete work specified in the Construction Documents.

B. Framing

1. Sill Plates and Ledgers:
a. Sill plates and ledgers on concrete shall be anchored with bolts, unless noted otherwise, shall have full bearing on concrete, and shall be placed for sheathing panel nailing as indicated. All bolt nuts shall be provided with a cut plate steel washer for bearing on wood.
b. Provide a minimum of two sill anchor bolts per sill piece with a bolt no less than 4 ½” and no more than 12” from the end of the sill.

Bolts to be 5/8" diameter x 12" (18” at curb) long at 48” on centers, unless otherwise shown or noted. Provide additional anchor bolts each side of a notch or hole, as per a typical plate splice, where notch or hole is in excess of 1/3 the plate width. At shear walls, provide a plate washer 3” x 3” x 0.229” minimum between the sill and nut at anchor bolts. Plate washer to extend within ½ inch of the structural wall sheathing. Offset and/or stagger anchor bolts, or provide larger plate washer as required.
c. Anchor bolt holes in sill plates or ledgers shall be 1/16" maximum larger than anchor bolt.

2. Stud Walls and Framing:
a. Cut studs and posts with square ends, unless otherwise shown or noted. All posts and beams shall be "cut to bear" unless otherwise detailed.
b. All studs in walls shall be placed with the shortest dimension parallel to the run of the wall. Bearing studs shall extend full height to be the supporting framing as shown; non-bearing studs shall extend to the supporting framing.
c. Provide double studs on each side of all openings, unless shown or noted otherwise.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 503 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 10 Rough Carpentry
d. All openings in stud walls and partitions shall be framed with headers across the top, as shown, with a minimum size (6" nominal depth x stud width) resting on short cripple studs, and as shown on the drawings.
e. All stud partitions and walls shall have horizontal solid blocking not less than 2x and of the same width as the stud, fitted and nailed into the studs at mid-height of stud, for studs over 8 feet in height, except as otherwise shown or specified. This blocking shall be so spaced that there shall be no concealed air spaces greater than eight feet in any dimension.
f. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating or other pipes shall be so framed as to give proper clearance for piping. Plumbing, heating and vent pipes exceeding 1-1/2" in inside diameter shall not be placed in partitions used as bearing or shear walls unless completely furred clear of the wall. No notching shall be allowed.

Pipes shall be placed in the center of the plate using a neat bored hole and the plates shall be strapped on each side with 3" x 36" x 14 gauge steel punched for 10d nails 3" on center, staggered, or as shown on the drawings.

3. Top Plates
a. Top plates shall be double, set single. Corners where stud wall or partitions meet shall be framed with studs on all surfaces and blocking to form a "rigid" corner with nailing for all corners. Double top plates shall be lapped at corners. Lap splices and nailing per the drawings.

4. Floor, Roof and Ceiling Framing
a. Joists and beams shall be accurately aligned and the position and spacing of all joists and beams shall be as shown and be coordinated with other framing and to other trades prior to actual construction.
b. Place all joists and beams with crown up. Cantilevered joists and beams shall be placed with the crown down.
c. Cutting of wood girders, beams or joists for electrical and mechanical lines shall be limited to cuts and bored holes not deeper than 1/5 of the beam depth from the top and located not farther from the support than three times the beam depth and not less than the beam depth. Cuts in excess of this, or single bored holes with a diameter of more than 1" are not permitted without special provisions for framing the beams. Location of all cuts in framing shall receive the prior review of the Architect/Engineer. d. Provide vent holes in rafters and/or blocking as shown and/or directed by the Architect.

3.2 STRUCTURAL SHEATHING
A. General

1. Sheathing nailing shall be as required on the drawings. Do not overdrive (Do not break skin of sheathing face sheet). Over driving will be cause for rejection.

2. Form sheathing may be re-used for concealed sheathing provided the lumber at the time of re-use is approved by the Architect, meets with the framing grade requirements specified herein, is in good condition, and is thoroughly cleaned with all nails removed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 504 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 11 Rough Carpentry

3. Pneumatic nailing devices shall be adjustable so that nail heads do not penetrate skin of sheathing. Contractor shall submit equipment and nails for review prior to use. Refer to PART 2 for other nailing requirements.

B. Roof and Floor Sheathing: Except "Panelized Roofs", lay with face grain perpendicular to roof rafters, roof trusses or floor joists. Stagger sheets. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x material unless noted otherwise.

C. Wall Sheathing: Lay with face grain either parallel or perpendicular to studs.

Exposed bottom edges shall be sealed as recommended by manufacturer. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x materials unless noted otherwise.

D. Panelized Roofs: Where sheathing is set @ 8'-0 1/8" spacing, cut every fourth sheet short by 1/2" to re-align structural framing that has been specified to be spaced at even units of 2, 4 or 8 feet.

3.3 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. General: Nails, spikes, screws, fabricated sheet metal anchors, ties, hangers and any other materials shown or required for the attachment of wood to concrete and wood to steel and wood to wood shall be furnished and installed as part of this work.

B. Framing Nailing: All framing nailing shall conform to minimum requirements of the Building Code, and with details shown on the drawing.

C. Bolts, Lag Screws and Washers:

1. Bolts in wood shall be machine bolts unless otherwise noted and shall be of such length that the bearing length of the treads does not exceed ¼ of the full bearing length in the member holding the treads. Bolt holes in wood shall be 1/32" oversized. Bolt holes for sill plates may be 1/16" maximum oversize. Holes in steel shall be 1/16" oversize. See Section

3.1 for anchor bolts at sill plates and ledgers.

2. Provide square plate or malleable iron washer and nut at head where bearing is against wood; cut washer under nut where it is against steel.

Washer will not be required under head of carriage bolts. Provide malleable iron washers where exposed.

3. All nuts shall be tightened when placed and retightened at completion of the job or immediately before closing with final construction.

4. Lag screws shall be screwed (not driven) into place. Drill pilot hole to 70% of shank diameter. Drill clearance hole to full shank diameter and depth of unthreaded screw length.

D. Wood Screws: Minimum penetration is 10 diameters unless noted otherwise.

Where fastening hardwood timber species or where wood tends to split, provide pilot hole 70% of screw shank diameter.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD
A. Coordinate installation of wood decking, metal-web wood joists, glued-laminated wood construction, shop-fabricated wood trusses, and wood I- joists.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 505 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 12 Rough Carpentry
B. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. Fasten curbs corner-to-corner and to rafters with framing connectors configured for this application.

C. Blocking:

1. Provide fire blocking at locations and spacing’s as required by CBC Chapter 7. Locate other blocking, supplementary framing, backing plates and bracing to facilitate installation of finish materials, fixtures, equipment, services, accessories, and trim requiring attachment and support.

2. Solid block joists and rafters over all supports with blocking of the same size and material as the joist or rafter.

D. Furring:

1. Nominal 1 inch x 3 inch minimum, continuous and spaced at 16 inches on center, maximum.

2. Install plumb, rigid, and level. Shim where necessary to provide a true, even plane suitable to receive the finish required.

3. Attach to concrete and masonry as shown in the contract drawings.

E. Bridging: Use 2 inch solid cross bridging. Nail bottom ends of bridging only after sheathing has been nailed.

F. Stair Framing: Provide with 3 stair stringers for each set of stairs, unless otherwise shown. Cut notches to receive exact size of treads and risers (if any) shown, with no change in dimensions between landings. Provide stringers of size shown, or if not shown, of a size to allow not less than 3-1/2 inch of effective depth, measured perpendicular to the rake of the stringer, after notching.

G. Install miscellaneous metal angles, bolts, and other items; secure into formwork where embedded in concrete.

H. Install accessory items not otherwise set under other sections; after completion of painting and other finishing work; in locations shown or directed by the Architect. Set items plumb, level, and secure using appropriate fastening as applicable.

3.5 FIELD APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Field treat all end cuts and holes in preservative treated materials per PART 2.

B. Apply two brush coats; or full-immersion dip not less than 15 minutes; or as required to thoroughly saturate all surfaces after cutting.

C. Air dry 2-hours minimum before installation.

3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 506 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 13 Rough Carpentry
C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. Provide framed substrates meeting requirements for application of finishes specified in other sections.

D. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents and tool marks, unsanded rough or torn faces and corners, and other defects.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following tests and submit reports as specified in Division 01:

1. Moisture content of all lumber at time of close-in.

2. Periodic special inspection of nailing, bolting, and other fastening within the seismic-force-resisting system including shear walls, wood diaphragms, etc. per CBC Section 1705.12.2, excluding systems with sheathing nailing spacing greater than 4” on center.

3. Special inspection of high load diaphragms per CBC Section 1705.5.1 where designated on documents.

3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Replace all defective work at Contractor's expense.

B. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work.

C. Correct defects using means that will not injure the materials.

D. Replace defective or damaged work which cannot be corrected in the field with new work, or return defective items to the shop for repair.

E. Repair or replace framing lumber sagged, twisted or warped due to shrinkage from excessive moisture content at time of installation, or from other causes.

F. Adjust to meet specified tolerances.

G. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of damaged, defective, or missing work.

H. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer's costs for (re-)design and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

I. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection, leave free of grime and dirt.

Remove unused materials, tools, equipment, and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 507 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 10 00 - 14 Rough Carpentry
B. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying cleaning and disposal.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.

2. Do not burn scrap on project site.

3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.

4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

C. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

D. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

E. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 508 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 17 33 - 1 Wood I-Joists
SECTION 06 17 33

WOOD I-JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Include: The furnishing and installation of all wood I-joists as shown on the drawings, herein specified and necessary to complete the work.

B. Related Sections

1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Agency Services.

2. Pertinent sections of Division 06 specifying Rough Carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, latest adopted edition (herein noted as CBC) Chapter 23 Wood.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / American Wood Council (AWC) “National Design Standard (NDS) for Wood Construction”.

C. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) “Acceptance Criteria (AC) 14 Prefabricated Wood I-Joists”.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D5055 “Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, furnished by the Manufacturer, showing all critical dimensions for determining fit and placement in the building and erection instructions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All wood I-joists shall be manufactured in a shop approved for fabrication by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Wood I-joists are not required to be continuously inspected during fabrication, but must carry a stamp indicating the plant of manufacture, date of manufacture, and logo of the third party independent inspection agency, conforming to AC14 and ASTM D5055.

C. Fabricators must have a minimum of three years of experience in manufacturing comparable systems and shall have a valid evaluation report issued by a qualified evaluation agency.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 509 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 17 33 - 2 Wood I-Joists
D. Wood I-joists delivered shall be free from any defects in materials, and the members shall be adequate to carry the design loads for the life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Joists shall be manufactured from materials in the evaluation report and shall be of sizes and shapes shown on the contract documents.

B. Blocking construction shall be the same as I-joists, unless noted otherwise.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Camber – None, unless noted otherwise.

B. Tolerances:

1. Length (between outside bearing edges): +/- 1/2 inch

2. Depth: +/- 3/8 inch

3. Camber: +/- 1/4 inch
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Wood I-joists shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather. They shall be handled with care so they are not damaged. Provide bearing supports and bracings to avoid bending or overturning of I-joists, and protect I-joists from construction operations.

3.2 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Use all means necessary to coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections to ensure proper and adequate erection of the work of this section.

B. Wood I-joists shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and installation instructions therein.

C. Temporary construction loads, which will cause member stresses beyond design limits, are not permitted.

D. Erection bracing in addition to specified bridging is to be provided to keep the Ijoists straight and plumb as required to assure adequate lateral support for the individual I-joist and entire system until the sheathing material has been applied.

Bridging as shown on the drawings and per Manufacturer's recommendations shall be installed as erection of I-joists progresses and before any construction loads are placed on the I-joists.

E. Round holes may be cut in the I-joist web as indicated on the drawings. Square or rectangular holes may be cut when the diagonal dimension of the square or rectangular hole does not exceed the diameter of the maximum allowable round holes shown on the drawing. Overcut square or rectangular holes shall be

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 510 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 17 33 - 3 Wood I-Joists
treated as a hole matching the overcut. Holes exceeding maximum holes shown on the drawings are cause for rejection of the I-joist.

F. The Contractor shall give notification prior to enclosing the I-joists to provide opportunity for inspection of the installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 511 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 17 33 - 4 Wood I-Joists
BLANK

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 512 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 18 00 - 1 Glue Laminated Construction
SECTION 06 18 00

GLUE LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment for glued laminated timber necessary to complete work shown, implied, specified and required.

B. Related Sections:

1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Agency services.

2. 06 1000 Rough Carpentry

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, latest adopted edition (herein noted as CBC): Chapter 23 Wood.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A190.1 “Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber”.

C. ANSI 117 “Standard Specification for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species”.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3737 “Standard Practice for Establishing Allowable Properties for Structural Glued Laminated Timber (Glulam)”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer’s review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units of work in a submittal. Include all of the following:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, lengths, appearance grade, and locations of structural members.

2. Cross-reference all shop drawing detail references to contract document detail references.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 513 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 18 00 - 2 Glue Laminated Construction

3. Secure all field measurements as necessary to complete this work, prior to submittal.

D. Certifications:

1. ANSI/AITC Certificate of Conformance.

E. Warranty:

1. Two copies of a five-year warranty, signed by an officer of the manufacturer, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer stating that the workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer at no cost to the Owner.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each glued laminated member shall bear the ANSI/AITC Quality Mark to indicate conformance to ANSI A190.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber

1. Conform to ANSI/AITC 117.

2. Laminations shall be 2 inch nominal thickness unless otherwise noted.

3. 16% maximum moisture content (MC) at time of manufacture.

4. All laminations to be greater than 90% heartwood, unless noted otherwise.

B. Adhesive: Shall be exterior grade for wet surface condition above 16% and shall meet requirements of ANSI 405.

C. Interior use glue laminated members shall be manufactured entirely from Douglas Fir.

1. Simple span beams shall be combination 24F-V4-1.8E.

2. Beams with intermediate supports and/or cantilevers shall be combination 24F-V8-1.8E.

3. Posts and truss members shall be combination 3-1.9E.

D. Glue laminated members that are protected from weather by a roof, eave, or similar covering may be Douglas Fir. The ends shall be flashed and treated with approved wood preservative to prevent decay.

E. Glue laminated members with exterior exposure shall be fabricated entirely from Alaskan Yellow Cedar (AYC). No sap wood permitted.

1. Simple span beams shall be combination 20F-V12-1.5E.

2. Beams with intermediate supports and/or cantilevers shall be combination 20F-V13-1.5E.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 514 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 18 00 - 3 Glue Laminated Construction

3. Posts and truss members shall be combination 20F-V13-1.5E.

F. Radial Tension Reinforcement: ANSI/AITC 404.

2.2 CAMBER
A. All beams shall be cambered as noted on the drawing. Where no camber is noted, provide 5,000 ft radius camber at simple span beams.

B. Cambers specified shall be provided within tolerances per ANSI A190.1. The Contractor shall verify all beam cambers prior to the erection and report his findings in writing to the engineer for review and comment.

2.3 APPEARANCE
A. Glued laminated members shall be Industrial Appearance Grade when not exposed to permanent view and Architectural Appearance Grade otherwise.

Appearance to meet the requirements of ANSI A190.1.

2.4 PROTECTION
A. Protection during shipping and field handling to meet requirements of AITC 111, including protective wrapping and proper storage of members to prevent increased moisture content and damage. Individually wrap members with Architectural Appearance Grade.

B. Ends shall be sealed after end trimming and entire surface of members shall be factory sealed with a penetrating sealer that has been approved by the Architect.

Field cuts, notches, and daps shall receive one coat of the same sealer prior to erection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION
A. Members shall be seat cut to bear, dapped, etc. as detailed on the drawings prior to erection.

B. Members shall be erected with suitable equipment and secured in place as detailed on the drawings.

C. Glued laminated members shall be aligned and braced until all secondary members or other framing is secured. Contractor shall verify all beam cambers in the field prior to erection.

3.2 CLEANING
A. All debris resulting from this portion of the work shall be removed from the site upon completion.

B. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 515 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 18 00 - 4 Glue Laminated Construction
BLANK

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 516 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 20 00 - 1 Finish Carpentry
SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide finish carpentry with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide exterior wood trim and wood outriggers.

2. Provide wood decks.

3. Provide interior wood windowsills.

4. Provide stainless steel closet poles.

5. Provide Janitor closet mop holders.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 40 00: Architectural woodwork; casework and countertops.

2. Section 07 46 20: Wood board soffits.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 3.1 (NAAWS).

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Wood Jambs: Coordinate wood door jambs with Section 08 14 00 – Wood Doors for pre-hung wood doors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit literature for manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening, and joining details, finishes, and accessories.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of finish carpentry.

D. Assurance Options: NAAWS certification and monitored compliance programs will not be required for finish carpentry.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks, and for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60-degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 517 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 20 00 - 2 Finish Carpentry
C. Do not begin installation of finish carpentry until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational.

1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70-degrees F and 50% to 55% relative humidity.

D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide finish carpentry systems specified complying with North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) and including accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Opaque Painted Exterior Wood Trim and Outriggers:

1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade.

2. Wood: Clear Western Red Cedar.

3. Cut: Mixed Grain.

4. Texture: Surfaced.

C. Wood Decking:

1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade.

2. Wood: Clear Ipe (Ironwood).

3. Cut: Mixed Grain.

4. Texture: Surfaced.

D. Opaque Painted Interior Wood Window Sills:

1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade.

2. Wood: Solid White Birch or Poplar.

3. Cut: Mixed Grain.

4. Texture: Surfaced.

E. Stainless-Steel Closet Poles: Provide stainless-steel tube units with stainless-steel end brackets; provide stainless-steel intermediate brackets where recommended by manufacturer; bright finish.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Knape & Vogt Mfg Co./660 Stainless Steel Pole, 734-735 brackets. b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

F. Janitor Closet Mop Holders: Spring loaded anti-slip mop holders with rubber cam, with three mop holders on stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc./Model B-223.
b. Bradley Corp./Model 9953.
c. American Specialties Inc./Model 0796A.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 518 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 20 00 - 3 Finish Carpentry
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

G. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-in-place anchors.

H. Wood Filler: Color to match wood being filled.

2.1 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.

B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

1. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by applicable authorities prior to commencement of installation.

D. Inspect each piece of finish carpentry and discard damaged and defective pieces.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work consistent with specified NAAWS quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials prior to installation; comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

B. Secure work to blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

C. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

D. Install finish carpentry in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10'-0".

1. For longer runs, use only one piece less than 10'-0" in any straight run; provide scarf joints between members.

2. Stagger joints in adjacent members.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 519 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 20 00 - 4 Finish Carpentry

3. Cope at returns and miter at corners.

E. Accessories: Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in locations indicated or as directed by Architect.

F. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.

2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.

3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".

G. Preparation for Field Finishing:

1. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

2. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site-applied finishes.

3. Seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer consistent with finish coats specified under Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 520 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 40 00 - 1 Architectural Woodwork
SECTION 06 40 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.

1. Provide custom wood cabinetwork.

2. Provide countertops.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 20 00: Finish carpentry including trim wood decking.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, 3.1 (NAAWS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening, joining details, finishes, and accessories.

1. Certification: Provide Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on shop drawings.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed finish.

1. Furnish samples of each exposed casework hardware.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks, for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations, and for paints and coatings.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Member of Sponsor of North American Architectural Woodwork Standards with minimum five years successful experience fabricating woodwork like that required for Project.

C. Standards: Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS).

1. Certified Compliance Program (CCP): Comply with Woodwork Institute “Certified Compliance Program (CCP) as defined in NAAWS.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 521 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 40 00 - 2 Architectural Woodwork

2. Certified Seismic Installation Program (CSIP): Comply with Woodwork Institute Certified Seismic Installation Program.
a. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic anchorage for wall cabinets as required by California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver architectural woodwork until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

1. Allow architectural woodwork shop finish to completely dry prior to delivery to site; allow materials to off-gas volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions off site.

B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60-degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.

C. Do not begin installation of architectural woodwork until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational.

1. Maintain installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative humidity.

D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.

B. Plastic Laminate Finished Casework:

1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade frameless, flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated. a. Special: Provide each single length section of casework in largest such sections as access and openings allow.
1) Multiple self-supporting units fastened together to form larger unit allowed only where access and openings do not allow single lengths.

2. Plastic Laminates:
a. Types: NEMA LD-3.1 high pressure laminates.
1) Horizontal Surfaces: General Purpose Type, nominal 0.050". 2) Vertical Surfaces: Vertical Surface Type, nominal 0.032". 3) Unexposed Surfaces: Balanced with 0.030" melamine backing sheet. b. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns, excluding metallics.

3. Core: Premium grade core. Provide plywood core for boxes, doors, and drawer fronts based on Columbia Forest Products/Classic Core engineered composite with no added formaldehyde and free of toxic materials.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 522 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 40 00 - 3 Architectural Woodwork
C. Casework Hardware: Provide casework hardware items as required for complete installation as indicated; provide types as listed in North American Architectural Woodwork Standards for casework, but no less than following types.

1. Plug-In Pin Type Shelf Supports (Transparent Finished Casework): Match BHMA A156.9 B04013 spoon type plug-in supports; provide holes 1" on center.

2. Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B01602 or B01603 frameless European concealed type, minimum 160 degree opening, with spring closer.

3. Cabinet Pulls: Back mounted wire type, 4" center to center, clear aluminum, as approved by Architect.

4. Drawer Slides: Full extension, rail mounted type, minimum 100 lb. capacity with ball-bearing rollers; self-closing.

5. Cabinet Locks: Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock with five pin tumblers as approved by Architect, two keys each. Keying as directed by Owner.

6. Dorm Room and First Floor Bathroom Locker Locks: Recessed mounted, mechanical push button keypad locks.
a. Basis of Design: Zephyr/6500 Professional Series Mechanical Push Button Locks.

D. Solid Polymer Countertops: Manufacturer's standard polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match top.

1. Manufacturers:
a. DuPont Co./Corian.
b. Avonite, Inc./Avonite.
c. Formica Corp./Surell.
d. Chemcore Industries/Dovae.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Quality: NAAWS/Premium Grade.

3. Type: Not less than 1/2" thick sheet; coordinate with bowls as indicated and as specified in Division 22.

4. Color: Manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

E. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-in-place anchors.

F. Wood Filler: Color to match wood being filled.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate architectural woodwork in accordance with specified North American Architectural Woodwork Standards.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 523 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 40 00 - 4 Architectural Woodwork
B. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

1. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts.

2. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern.

3. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate surfaces.

4. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures, and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

5. Prime paint contact surfaces of cutouts.

C. Countertops: Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts where more than one-piece countertops are required.

1. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

2. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures, and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

3. Splashes and edges as indicated or as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

D. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

E. Assemble woodwork in shop in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work consistent with North American Architectural Woodwork Standards specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required, using concealed shims.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

C. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation except where otherwise required by NAAWS.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 524 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
06 40 00 - 5 Architectural Woodwork
D. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

E. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory-trained mechanics.

F. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements.

G. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.

2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.

3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 525 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 13 00 - 1 Sheet Waterproofing
SECTION 07 13 00

SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide self-adhesive sheet membrane waterproofing system, including sealing joints and protrusions through waterproofing, with protective board, drainage composite covering, and accessories for complete watertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment including sheet membranes.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for waterproofing system and protection board.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate flashings, joints, sealing at openings, projections, and waterproofing of holes, slots and sleeves.

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's representative's certification work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, except where specifically authorized by manufacturer's representative for specific materials.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not structural failure.

2. Period: Two years.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 526 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 13 00 - 2 Sheet Waterproofing
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 5 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace) /Bituthene 4000 Waterproofing System.

B. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing/CCW Miradri Waterproofing.

C. Polyguard Products, Inc./Polyguard No. 650.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide sheet membrane waterproofing system including sealing joints and protrusions through waterproofing, protective covering, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Waterproofing System: System consisting of sheet membrane of rubberized asphalt and polyethylene film, total thickness approximately 60 mil, and fluid applied rubberized asphalt for sealing system.

1. Low Temperature Applications: Where temperatures are between 25 degrees F and 40 degrees F, use manufacturer's special membrane and primer for low temperature applications.

D. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer of applications involved; primer is required for waterproofing applications.

E. Crack and Expansion Joint Sealants: Types as recommended by waterproofing system manufacturer, compatible with waterproofing system.

F. Protective Covering: Preformed asphalt impregnated board or similar protective cover recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; minimum 1/8” thick.

G. Drainage Composite: Formed plastic with filter fabric designed to allow penetration and drainage of water while retaining silts, soils, and similar particulate matter; type recommended by manufacturer for application.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Waterproofing manufacturer.
b. GCP (Grace)/Hydroduct Drainage Composite.
c. Carlisle/CCW MiraDRAIN.
d. Colbond, Inc./Enkadrain.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 527 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 13 00 - 3 Sheet Waterproofing
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Ensure sleeves, curbs and projections which pass through waterproofing are properly and rigidly installed.

C. Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves and projections which may be detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

1. Repair surfaces as required by manufacturer's representative.

D. Seal cracks and expansion joints with recommended backup material and sealant; ensure proper depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Ensure expansion joints are sharply formed, free of broken edges and loose aggregates.

F. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

G. Prime surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions as required for watertight installation.

1. Seal joints and items projecting through waterproofing.

B. Seam Overlap: Minimum 2-1/2".

1. Stagger end laps.

C. Reinforce corners with double applications of waterproofing unless otherwise specifically recommended by manufacturer's representative.

D. Allow extra materials at joints with anticipated movement to permit movement without stressing waterproofing.

E. Roll waterproofing membrane smooth, firmly and completely to surfaces indicated, with no fish-mouths or bunches of material.

F. Inspect and repair waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to application of protection board and backfill.

G. As soon as possible after installation and inspection apply protection boards and drainage composites in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Neatly fit around pipes and penetrations.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 528 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 13 00 - 4 Sheet Waterproofing

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect work of Project on regular basis and provide certification waterproofing has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Provide unobstructed access to waterproofing work.

2. Correct defects and irregularities as advised by manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 529 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 19 00 - 1 Water Repellent
SECTION 07 19 00

WATER REPELLENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide clear liquid penetrating type water repellent coating.

1. Location: Apply water repellent to following exterior exposed surfaces. a. Non-load bearing brick masonry.
b. Concrete unit masonry.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 30 00: Tile assembly sealers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Samples: Submit sample units with water repellent coating applied to half of each sample face; indicate which half has coating.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

B. Qualification of Installers: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

C. Mock-Up: Prior to commencing work, including bulk purchase and delivery of material, prepare small application in unobtrusive location of typical substrate in manner acceptable to Architect.

1. Proceed only after Architect's acceptance of test application or as otherwise directed.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply coating during inclement weather, when air temperature is below 50- degrees F, or when rain or temperatures below 40-degrees F are predicted for a period of 24 hours.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 530 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 19 00 - 2 Water Repellent
B. Do not apply coating earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet.

C. Do not apply coating to damp, dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days unless otherwise approved in writing by coating manufacturer.

D. Protect glass, glazed products, and landscaping from contact with water repellent coating; replace materials damaged by water repellent coating.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of water repellent coating to resist penetration of water.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. ProSoCo/Sure Klean SL 100.

B. BASF Master Builders/MasterProtect H 1000 System.

C. Chemprobe Products Industries Inc./CP-500W.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide silane or siloxane based clear liquid water repellent coating which does not affect appearance of coated material.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturer to be fully compatible with indicated substrates and joint sealers which are in contact with water repellent coating.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions as required by applicable codes and regulations.

1. Comply with applicable air quality management authority.

D. Water Repellent Coating: Manufacturer's standard penetrating type silane or siloxane-based sealers specified conforming to applicable limitations on volatile organic compounds.

1. Provide specific systems as recommended by manufacturer for substrates involved.

2. Finish: Water repellent coating shall not alter appearance, color, or texture of substrate under any lighting conditions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 531 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 19 00 - 3 Water Repellent
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates and apply coating in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt, and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of water repellent coating.

C. Assure coating compatibility with each type of joint sealer within or adjacent to surfaces receiving waterproof coating.

1. Mask surfaces indicated to receive joint sealers which would be adversely affected by coating.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including maximum allowable coverage.

B. Take special care to prevent damage to adjacent materials from application of coating; repair or replace materials damaged due to application of coating.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 532 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 21 00 - 1 Thermal Insulation
SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide insulation and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide thermal batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.

2. Provide spray-foam insulation.

3. Provide continuous insulation system.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping.

2. Section 09 21 00: Acoustical insulation concealed in gypsum board systems.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Interior Vapor Retarders: Where specifications require foil faced vapor retarders as part of building thermal insulation system, intent is to prevent migration of spores from mold and mildew into interior building spaces.

1. Intent is to provide air barrier and vapor retarder on interior surface while allowing vapor to move through exterior wall vapor permeable surfaces, while vapor permeable water barriers are maintained at exterior side of wall.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of insulation.

1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings.

Approvals of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide thermal insulation with accessories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 533 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 21 00 - 2 Thermal Insulation
B. Thermal Batt Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting resin binders, conforming to ASTM C665; formaldehyde-free.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville/FSK-25 Foil Faced Thermal-Shield Insulation. b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas FS-25 Foil Faced Insulation. c. CertainTeed/CertaPro Commercial Foil Faced FSK-25 Insulation. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Thickness: 5-1/2” unless otherwise indicated.

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

4. Vapor Retarder: Type III, aluminum vapor retarder on one side.

C. Spray-Foam Insulation: Provide on-site foaming type closed cell insulation as required to fill cavity.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville/Corbond III Closed Cell Insulation.
b. CertainTeed/CertaSpray Closed Cell Insulation.
c. BASF/Spraytite Closed Cell Insulation.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. R-Value/Thickness: As indicated, maximum possible for spaces indicated to be insulated where not specifically indicated.

D. Continuous Insulation at Exterior Walls (Exposed to Water): ASTM C578 Type IV, extruded polystyrene (XPS) rigid foam insulation designed for continuous insulation at exterior walls and acceptable for application over weather barrier/underlayment.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Dow.
b. Owens Corning.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Basis of Design: Dow/Foamular 250 Rigid Foam Insulation.

3. Thickness/R-Value: Thick as indicated, with minimum r-5 per inch.

4. Standards: Provide insulation approved for UL U424 fire tested assemblies and for NFPA 285.

E. Accessories: Furnish as recommended by insulation manufacturer for insulation types, substrates, and conditions involved.

1. Fasteners and Attachment Devices: Comply with insulation manufacturer recommendations for attachment of insulation.

2. Fasteners to withstand loads specified for system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 534 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 21 00 - 3 Thermal Insulation

3. Vapor Retarder Tape: Minimum 2" wide self-adhering type designed to maintain vapor retarder integrity and complying with fire resistance ratings as required by applicable codes.

4. Penetration Type Insulation Supports: Galvanized or electroplated steel penetration supports with adhesive attachment to substrate and support disc.

5. Thermal Break Insulation Supports for Continuous Insulation: Provide attachment system designed specifically for supporting both continuous insulation and exterior building cladding systems indicated.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Armatherm (844.360.1036)/Armatherm Z Girt Structural Thermal Break. 2) Knight Wall Systems (855.597.9255)/CI or HCI System. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Provide system recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated with accessories as required for complete thermally broken continuous insulation system in configurations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation; beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable code requirements. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces.

1. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical services within insulation plane; leave no gaps or voids; maintain integrity of thermal barrier.

2. Backed Insulation: Use insulation free of ripped backs and edges.

3. Insulations with Vapor Retarder Facing: Install insulation with integral vapor retarder with vapor retarder toward inside of building.

B. Batt Insulation: Friction fit batt insulation in place; use tape or penetration supports as necessary to assure permanent installation.

1. Taping: Tape joints and tears in integral vapor retarder, including joints between insulation and surrounding construction, to ensure vapor-tight installation.

2. Penetration Supports: Cut or bend pins in locations accessible to maintenance personnel, to eliminate potential hazards from exposed pinpoints.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 535 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 21 00 - 4 Thermal Insulation
C. Spray-Foam Insulation: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve specified thermal resistance and uniform coverage and density.

1. Assure clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items installed within insulation space are in place before applying insulation.

2. Remove excess, overspray, droppings, and debris.

D. Continuous Insulation Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for continuous insulation for use in systems indicated.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 536 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 26 00 - 1 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
SECTION 07 26 00

BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDER
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and slab-on-grade concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor retarder and sand bed below vapor retarder.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply vapor retarder during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Fortifiber Corp./Ultra 15.

B. Raven Industries, Inc./Vapor Block # VB 15 (15 mil Blue).

C. Stego Industries, Inc./Stego Wrap (15 mil).

D. W.R. Meadows/Perminator (15 mils).

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and slab-on-grade concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor retarder and sand bed below vapor retarder.

B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A vapor retarder consisting of 15 mil polyolefin film.

1. Permeance: Maximum 0.025 perms, ASTM F1249 and E154 tests.

2. Resistance to Puncture: Minimum 2200 grams, ASTM D1709, Method B.

3. Tear Resistance: Minimum 8.74 lbs., ASTM D1004.

4. Tensile Strength: Minimum 35 lbs/in., ASTM E154, Section 9, Method D-882, in both directions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 537 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 26 00 - 2 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
C. Joint Sealer: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer and providing comparable permeance to vapor retarder.

D. Sand Bed: Clean natural sand; free from silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure sleeves, curbs and projections that penetrate vapor retarder are properly and rigidly installed.

B. Ensure substrate is free of projections and irregularities that may be detrimental to proper installation of vapor retarder.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Spread and roll sand to provide smooth, even bed for vapor retarder.

B. Apply vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and in accordance with ASTM E1643; comply with most restrictive where conflicts occur.

1. Seal items projecting through vapor retarder with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Seams: Minimum 12" overlap, sealed with pressure sensitive tape for vapor tight seal.

D. Lay vapor retarder membrane smooth with no fish-mouths or bunches of material.

E. Inspect and repair vapor retarder prior to application of concrete slab; tape tears and repair damage.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 538 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 28 00 - 1 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
SECTION 07 28 00

WEATHER BARRIER/UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier systems for siding, sloped roofing, flashing and sheet metal, and penetrations with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

1. Wall Underlay: Provide vapor permeable underlayment and flashing for exterior wall applications, with related concealed metal flashings and accessories as required for complete airtight and watertight installation.

2. Sloped Roofing Underlay: Provide high temperature sheet membrane underlayment at sloped roofing systems, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

3. Flashings and Sheet Metal Underlay: Provide high temperature sheet membrane underlayment at flashings and sheet metal, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

4. Penetrations: Provide flashing for around penetrations through underlayment including but not limited to windows, doors, louvers, vents, piping, and conduit, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation. a. System: By same manufacturer as underlayment; system may be either fluid-applied or sheet membrane as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 42 45: Composite metal building panel system with rainscreen support.

2. Section 07 60 00: Exposed metal flashing.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Weather Barriers: Provide weather barrier/underlayment systems which, with other building components, comply with applicable code requirements for air barriers and water barriers.

1. Air Barriers: Air barriers shall be as defined by applicable Energy Code requirements and shall include standard exterior wall components and air seal joint sealants specified in Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealants.

2. Water Barriers: Water barriers shall be as defined by applicable Building Code requirements and shall include vapor permeable systems with or without rainscreen barriers intended to extend amount of water drained to exterior.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 539 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 28 00 - 2 Weather Barrier/Underlayment

3. Interior Vapor Retarders: Where specifications require foil faced vapor retarders as part of building thermal insulation system, intent is to prevent migration of spores from mold and mildew into interior building spaces. a. Intent is to provide air barrier and vapor retarder on interior surface while allowing vapor to move through exterior wall vapor permeable surfaces, while vapor permeable water barriers are maintained at exterior side of wall.

4. Penetrations: Intent of sealing window openings, door openings, and other penetrations through underlayment is to ensure water cannot move from exterior surface past water barriers and into building.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work; require attendance of parties directly affecting underlayment.

1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature for each type of underlayment.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each material.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier systems for siding, sloped roofing, flashing and sheet metal, and penetrations with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 540 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 28 00 - 3 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
C. Wall Underlay: Provide vapor permeable air and water barrier underlayment system for complete watertight installation as recommended by manufacturer for substrates and applications indicated.

1. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace)/Perm-A-Barrier VPS Self-Adhering Sheet. b. Henry Company/Blueskin SA and SA HT Air and Weather Barrier. c. Carlisle Corp./CCW 705 MSDS.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

D. High Temperature Sloped Roofing Underlay: High temperature sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace).
b. Henry Company.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

E. Sheet Metal and Flashing Underlay: High temperature sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace).
b. Henry Company.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

F. Penetrations: Provide flashing at penetrations with accessories for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated. System to be compatible with adjacent underlayment materials.

1. Manufacturers: Provide penetration flashing by underlayment manufacturer.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

G. Concealed Metal Flashings Integral with Underlay: Minimum 26 gage thick steel with minimum 0.90 oz/sf galvanized coating; ASTM A653.

1. Fasteners: Standard round wire type of hot dipped galvanized steel; minimum 19/64" head diameter and 0.104" shank diameter; minimum 7/8" long.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 541 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 28 00 - 4 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
H. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.

I. Accessories: Provide as recommended by underlayment manufacturers for specific applications.

1. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, for sealing and coating flashings; free of toxic solvents and free of asbestos. Capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50% R.H.

2.2 FLASHING FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Form flashings to drain water to exterior at roofing and siding construction for penetrations, sill, and header flashings.

C. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, in maximum possible lengths and free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

D. Hem exposed edges of metal flashings minimum 1/4" on underside.

E. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of metal flashings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install underlayment over surfaces that are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids that could damage underlayment.

B. Coordinate installation with installation of components and items projecting through underlayment.

3.2 FLASHINGS INSTALLATION
A. Install flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Weatherlap joints minimum 2", seal with plastic cement, and secure in place.

C. Fastenings: Concealed in completed installation.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install weather barrier/underlayment in accordance with installation instructions and recommendations of each manufacturer and of manufacturers of products to cover weather barrier/underlayment; comply with applicable code requirements.

1. Wall Underlay: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

2. Sloped Roofing: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 542 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 28 00 - 5 Weather Barrier/Underlayment

3. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

4. Penetrations: Apply penetration flashing extending minimum 18" from penetrations, including windows and doors; start at bottom of penetration and weatherlap. a. Apply over metal flashing to direct water to exterior.

5. Weatherlap joints as recommended by system manufacturer.

6. Secure underlayment in place, stagger joints between sheet membrane layers; lap ends minimum 6"; stagger end joints.

B. Sheet Membranes: Weatherlap items projecting through sheet membrane underlayment and seal with sealer recommended by sheet membrane underlayment manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 543 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 10 - 1 Metal Roof Panels
SECTION 07 41 10

METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished corrugated metal roof panel system at Trash Enclosure including anchors, accessories, factory finished metal flashing, closures, gaskets, concealed sealants, and components for complete, weather-tight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 41 15: Manufactured standing seam metal roofing.

2. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal not integral with metal roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene pre-construction conference one week prior to metal roofing work to coordinate roofing with other trades; require attendance of parties directly affecting metal roofing work.

1. Review installation and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and recommendations for cleaning and protection.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish finished samples of each type of corrugated metal, exposed flashing, exposed closures, and gaskets.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installer: Company with minimum five years successful experience in work of comparable scope.

B. Mock-Up: Provide 50 square foot mock-up of corrugated metal roofing construction at location approved by Architect; approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 544 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 10 - 2 Metal Roof Panels

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide protective covering on factory finished flashing materials to protect them through installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. AEP Span.

B. CENTRIA.

C. Fabral, Inc.

D. MBCI.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished corrugated metal roofing systems including anchors, accessories, components, and integral sheet metal.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for metal roofing systems.

1. Maximum Allowable Deflection (Live Load Only): Member length/360.

2. Maximum Allowable Deflection (Live and Dead Load): Length/240.

C. Design Criteria: Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

1. Design system to accommodate tolerances to structure, provided irregularities do not exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 545 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 10 - 3 Metal Roof Panels
D. Corrugated Metal Roofing Systems: Provide corrugated metal roofing systems with anchoring assemblies and accessory components as required for complete, weathertight installation.

1. Basis of Design: AEP Span/Mini-V-Beam, 1-3/8” height.

2. Metal: Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel; minimum ASTM A924 and A653 G90 galvanized coating; provide heavier gages where design configurations exceed manufacturer recommendations.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer coil coat finish complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.

E. Integral Sheet Metal: Minimum 24 gage G90 galvanized steel with finish matching metal roof and wall panel system.

F. Closures, Gaskets and Concealed Sealants: Manufacturer's standard non-staining; noncorrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications.

1. Color: Exposed materials color to match adjacent panel system, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized minimum G90 coating.

1. Finish exposed fasteners to match system.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Internal and External Corners: Provide same materials, material thickness and finish as system.

1. Design profile to suit system, brake form, shop cut and factory miter to required angles.

2. Back mitered internal corners with minimum 24 gage sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile.

B. Expansion Joints: Provide concealed metal expansion control throughout system.

C. Integral Sheet Flashings, Closures, and Other Components: Brake formed to required profiles.

1. Comply with requirements for fabrication specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

D. Provide for positive drainage to exterior, any water entering or occurring within corrugated metal roofing systems.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 546 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 10 - 4 Metal Roof Panels
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate is free of elements that could be harmful to system.

B. Beginning of work signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure system to structure.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install corrugated metal roofing systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Install integral metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Comply with installation requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

D. Protect metal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with asbestos free bituminous paint.

1. Allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

E. Permanently fasten system to substrate, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Offset from True Alignment: Maximum 1/16" between adjacent members butting and in line.

2. Variation from Location: Maximum 3/4" from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

F. Locate end laps over supports; end lap panels minimum 2", ensure sidelaps are over firm secure bearing.

G. Provide expansion joints at regular basis, concealed within system.

H. Install sealants and gaskets where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

I. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

J. Remove protective coating when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 547 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 15 - 1 Manufactured Standing Seam Roofing
SECTION 07 41 15

MANUFACTURED STANDING SEAM ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished manufactured metal standing seam type roofing including integral metal flashings and sealants, and accessories as required for complete weather-tight installation.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 07 21 00: Thermal insulation.

2. Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment.

3. Section 07 41 10: Corrugated metal roof panels.

4. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal not integral with roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene pre-construction conference one week prior to metal roofing work to coordinate roofing with other trades; require attendance of parties directly affecting metal roofing work.

1. Review installation and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for prefabricated components, and recommendations for cleaning and protection.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations of and types of sealants, and anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish finished preformed metal roofing and each type of exposed metal flashing.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installer: Company with minimum five years successful experience in work of comparable scope.

B. Mock-Up: Provide 200 square foot mock-up of metal roofing construction at location approved by Architect; approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 548 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 15 - 2 Manufactured Standing Seam Roofing

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide protective covering on finished flashing materials to protect them through installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Three years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Morin, A Kingspan Group Company.

B. AEP Span.

C. Berridge Manufacturing Co.

D. ATAS International, Inc.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide factory finished manufactured metal standing seam type roofing including integral metal flashings and sealants, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for metal roofing systems.

1. Cool Roof System: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for “Cool Roof” system including three-year aged solar reflectance value requirements.
a. Label: System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label.

C. Design Criteria: Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

1. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure, provided irregularities do not exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.

2. Provide for positive drainage of water entering or occurring within preformed metal roofing system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 549 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 15 - 3 Manufactured Standing Seam Roofing
D. Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Preformed metal roofing system complete with anchoring assembly and accessory components.

1. Basis of Design: AEP Span/SpanLok HP with 2” standing seam system with pans approximately 16" on center unless otherwise indicated.

2. Sheet Metal: Minimum 22-gage galvanized steel, minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer coil coat finish complying with AAMA 2605.
a. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.

E. Flat Panel Soffit System: Factory formed metal panels with 12” vertical profile for soffits with anchorage assembly and accessory components for complete installation.

1. Basis of Design: AEP Span/Flush Panel concealed fastener panel system.

2. Sheet Metal: Minimum 24-gage galvanized steel, minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer coil coat finish complying with AAMA 2605.
b. Color: Match Morin/Permacoat Dove Gray.

F. Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use in conjunction with installation of metal roofing.

1. Non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications.

2. Color of exposed sealants and gaskets to match roofing.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard hot dip galvanized fasteners with not less than G90 galvanized coating.

1. Finish exposed fasteners to match roofing.

H. Underlayment: Specified in Section 07 28 00 – Weather Barrier/Underlayment.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Internal and External Corners: Same materials, material thickness and finish as roofing, profile to suit system, brake formed, shop-cut and factory mitered to required angles.

B. Mitered internal corners shall be backed with minimum 22-gage galvanized steel sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile.

C. Expansion Joints: Provide concealed metal expansion control throughout roofing system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 550 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 15 - 4 Manufactured Standing Seam Roofing
D. Integral Sheet Metal, Flashings, Gutters, Closures and Other Components: Brake formed to required profiles; conform to SMACNA Manual.

1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal E. Provide for positive drainage to exterior, any water entering or occurring within metal roofing systems.
.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate is free of elements that could be harmful to system.

B. Beginning of work signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure system to structure.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured metal standing seam roofing and metal soffit system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

B. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Comply with installation requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

D. Protect metal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint; allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

E. Permanently fasten roofing system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Maximum 1/16" offset from true alignment between adjacent members butting or in line.

2. Maximum 1/4" variation from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

F. Locate end laps over supports; end lap panels minimum 2"; ensure side-laps are over firm bearing.

G. Provide expansion joints at regular basis, concealed within system.

H. Use concealed fasteners except where specifically approved by Architect.

I. Install sealants and gaskets where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 551 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 41 15 - 5 Manufactured Standing Seam Roofing
J. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

K. Remove protective coating when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 552 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 25 - 1 Metal Wall Panels
SECTION 07 42 25

METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished concealed fastener metal wall panel system including accessories and components as required for complete weathertight installation.

1. System includes integral factory finished metal flashing, closures, gaskets, and concealed sealants.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 42 45: Composite metal building panels.

2. Section 07 42 90: Acoustical panel generator screen.

3. Section 07 60 00: Metal flashing not integral with metal wall panels.

4. Section 07 90 00: Joint sealants not concealed after panels are in place.

1.2 REFERENCES
B. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Convene pre-construction conference one week prior to commencing work. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work.

1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and recommendations for cleaning and protection.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details, including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Submit samples of finished metal siding, exposed flashing, exposed closures, and gaskets.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide protective covering on factory finished materials to protect them through installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 553 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 25 - 2 Metal Wall Panels

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 10 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM MANUFACTURES
A. Morin, A Kingspan Group Company.

B. AEP Span.

C. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.

D. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide factory finished concealed fastener metal wall panel system including accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Design metal wall panel system to withstand design loads as required by California Building Code.

1. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/180.

C. Design Criteria:

1. Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

2. Design system to accommodate tolerances to structure, provided irregularities do not exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.

3. Provide for positive drainage of any water entering or occurring within system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 554 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 25 - 3 Metal Wall Panels
D. Metal Wall Panel System: Factory formed metal panel siding of 12" vertical profile, with anchorage assembly and accessory components.

1. Basis of Design: Morin/F-12 Rainscreen System; with concealed fasteners.

2. Type: As indicated on Drawings, 12” profile system with concealed fasteners.

3. Metal: Not less than 0.050” aluminum; manufacturer’s standard alloy and temper.

4. Finish: Exposed surfaces shall have fluoropolymer type finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 and complying with AAMA 2605.
a. Color: Match Morin/Permacoat Dove Gray.

E. Integral Sheet Metal: Minimum 24 gage G90 galvanized steel with finish matching metal roofing system.

F. Supports: ASTM A36 shapes and ASTM A1011 or A1008 sheet steel, minimum 16 gage galvanized furring strips, minimum ASTM A123 or A924 and A653 G90 galvanized coating.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed type fasteners, galvanized minimum G90 coating.

H. Closures, Sealants, and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard non-staining; noncorrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications.

1. Color: Match metal siding.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Edges: Lapped edges fitted with continuous length sealant or gaskets.

B. Internal and External Corners: Same materials, material thickness and finish as siding; profiles to suit system, shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.

1. Back brace mitered internal corners with minimum 24 gage galvanized sheet stock, to maintain continuity of profile.

C. Expansion Joints: Same material and finish as panels; manufacturer's standard type, of profile to suit system, exposed fasteners to have same finish as siding.

D. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Infills, Caps: Same material and, where exposed, of same sheet stock; brake formed to required profiles.

E. Provide for positive drainage to exterior, any water entering or occurring within preformed metal panel system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate is free of elements that could be harmful to system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 555 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 25 - 4 Metal Wall Panels
B. Beginning of work signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required for securing metal wall panels to building.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal wall panel system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and installation instructions.

B. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Comply with installation requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Fabrication of exposed panel components on site is not permitted.

D. Exercise care when cutting siding on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surfaces.

E. Protect panel surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and other dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

1. Allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

F. Permanently fasten panel system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Maximum 1/16" offset from true alignment between adjacent members butting or in line.

2. Maximum 1/4" variation from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

G. Locate end laps over supports and end lap panels minimum 2". Locate side laps over firm bearings.

H. Provide expansion joints where recommended by manufacturer.

I. Use concealed fasteners except where approved by Architect.

J. Install sealant and gaskets where required to arrest direct weather penetration.

K. Provide both metal and EPDM gaskets at closures. If EPDM gaskets are loose apply sealant.

L. Provide oversized gasket closures at penetrations through metal wall panel system that will allow movement of item penetrating panel system without disturbing watertight closure.

M. Completed installation is to be free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles.

N. Remove protective coating when no longer required to protect materials from construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 556 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 45 - 1 Composite Metal Building Panels
SECTION 07 42 45

COMPOSITE METAL BUILDING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide preformed composite metal panel system with polymer core sandwiched between metal facing and backing sheets; with special rainscreen support system, anchorages, and accessories for complete weathertight system.

1. Provide flashings and trim integral with composite metal building panel system.

2. Provide joint sealers and gaskets integral with composite metal building panel system, installed in joints concealed after panels are in place.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment.

2. Section 07 42 25: Metal wall panels.

3. Section 07 42 90: Acoustical panel generator screen.

4. Section 07 60 00: Sheet metal and flashing not integral with siding.

5. Section 07 90 00: Joint sealants not concealed after panels are in place.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for manufactured products.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details, integral gaskets and sealants, and supports and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Submit samples of finished composite panel, and exposed components.

1. Submit range samples indicating anticipatable variances in color and gloss.

D. Certificates: Furnish manufacturer’s certificate indicating fabricator and Installer are acceptable if installation is not by panel manufacturer.

E. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 557 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 45 - 2 Composite Metal Building Panels

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for sealants.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Panel manufacturer or firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating composite wall panel systems for building cladding systems like those required for Project and acceptable to panel manufacturer.

C. Installer Qualification: Panel manufacturer or firm with minimum five years successful experience in similar projects and acceptable to panel manufacturer.

D. Mock-Up: Erect full-size mock-up representative of installation of composite metal panel installation; not less than 100 square feet. Approved mock-Up may be incorporated into Project.

1. Accepted mock-up establishes minimum standard of quality and workmanship.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL FABRICATORS
A. Elward Systems Corporation (800.933.5339).

B. NorthClad ACM Composite Panels (425.740.3702).

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide preformed composite metal panel system with polymer core sandwiched between metal facing and backing sheets; with special rainscreen support system, anchorages, and accessory components.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 558 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 45 - 3 Composite Metal Building Panels
B. Regulatory Requirements: Design composite metal panel system to withstand design loads as required by California Building Code.

1. Evaluation: Provide composite aluminum panel systems with NFPA 285 evaluation indicating compliance with applicable code requirements.

C. Performance Criteria: Design system to provide movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal temperature ranges.

1. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure.

D. Special Rainscreen Support System: Manufacturer’s standard components for specified system.

1. System Manufacturer:
a. Elward Systems Corporation.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Basis of Design: Elward Systems Corp./PER Pressure Equalized Rainscreen System.

E. Composite Metal Panel System: Panel system complete with supports and anchorage assembly, and accessory components.

1. Composite Metal Panel Manufacturers:
a. Alcan Inc./Alucobond.
b. Alcoa Architectural Products/Reynobond Composite Panels. c. Alpolic Materials Division Mitsubishi Chemical FP America/Alpolic Panels. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Face Sheets: Minimum 0.020" thick aluminum sheet.

3. Exposed Surface Finish:
a. Coil coat with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 based polyvinylidene fluoride resin; minimum 1 mil thickness and conforming to AAMA 2605.
1) Color: Custom color as indicated, as directed by Architect where not indicated.

2. Total Composite Panel Thickness: Minimum 4 mm (0.157").

3. Panel Construction: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a core of extruded thermoplastic (polyethylene) formed in continuous process with no glue or adhesive between core and face sheets.

F. Concealed Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard non-staining; noncorrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ozone resistant for exterior applications.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard fully concealed type, minimum ASTM A123 G90 galvanized coating; types to suit application.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 559 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 45 - 4 Composite Metal Building Panels

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Panel Flatness: No point on a single unit shall be more than 1/16" away from a straight edge between any two points on panel face.

1. Requirement does not include trim pieces and flashing.

B. Edges: Returned and finished to match panel face.

C. Internal and External Corners: Manufacturer's standard system with exposed parts finished to match panel face.

D. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Infills, Caps: Match composite metal panel finish; form to required profiles.

1. Thickness: Minimum 0.050" thick aluminum.

E. Provide for positive drainage to exterior, any water entering or occurring within panel system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify supporting structure is correctly position and aligned to receive panel system.

B. Clean free of elements that could be harmful to panel system.

C. Beginning of work signifies acceptance of conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install composite metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and installation instructions and with approved shop drawings.

1. Site fabricating of exposed components is not acceptable.

B. Exercise care when cutting components on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surfaces; do not damage exposed surfaces.

C. Protect panel surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint; allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

D. Permanently fasten siding system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Offset from True Alignment Between Adjacent Members: Maximum 1/16".

2. Variation from Plane or Location on Drawings: Maximum 1/4".

3. Deviation from Vertical and Horizontal Alignment: Maximum 1/4" in 20'-0", noncumulative.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 560 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 45 - 5 Composite Metal Building Panels
E. Provide expansion joints where recommended by manufacturer, concealed within panel system joints.

F. Use concealed fasteners unless specifically approved by Architect.

G. Install concealed sealants and gaskets where required to arrest direct weather protection.

1. Provide oversized gasket closures at penetrations through panels which will allow movement of item penetrating panel without disturbing weathertight closure.

H. Coordinate with Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealants to arrest direct weather penetration and to assure weathertight panel system.

I. Completed installation is to be free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 561 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 90 - 1 Acoustical Panel Generator Screen
SECTION 07 42 90

ACOUSTICAL PANEL GENERATOR SCREEN
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide shop finished acoustical panel generator screen system with channel support columns, anchorages, integral flashings, and accessories as required for complete secure installation.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate supports, dimensioning, panel details, panel layout, details, anchorages and method of anchorage, and method of installation.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.

D. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. IMI Acoustics, Division of Innovative Metal Industries, Inc. (909.796.6200).

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide shop finished acoustical panel generator screen system with channel support columns, anchorages, integral flashings, and accessories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 562 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 90 - 2 Acoustical Panel Generator Screen
B. Design Requirements: Design system to provide movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal temperature ranges.

C. Acoustical Panels: Shop fabricated acoustical panel screen system.

1. Materials: Manufacturer’s standard.

2. NRC Value: 1.0.

3. STC Value: 49 or better.

4. Panel Size: 1’-0” by 8’-0”.

5. Surface Finish: Exposed surfaces of panel system to have manufacturer’s premium quality exterior grade color finish as approved by Architect. a. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors where not otherwise indicated.

D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, corrosion resistant non-magnetic Type 304 or 316 stainless steel and minimum G90 hot dip galvanized to suit application; finish to match system when exposed.

E. Support System: As indicated and as required to support system indicated.

1. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36; not less than G90 hot-dip galvanized coating.

2. Prime paint steel components. Comply with requirements specified in Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

B. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.

D. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.

1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

E. Exposed Fasteners: Where approved, provide fasteners with same finish as system.

F. Expansion Joints: Same material and finish as panels; manufacturer's standard type, of profile to suit system, exposed fasteners to have same finish as system.

G. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 563 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 42 90 - 3 Acoustical Panel Generator Screen
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and installation instructions for secure installation.

B. Fabrication of exposed components on site is not permitted.

C. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and other dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

1. Allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

D. Permanently fasten system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Maximum 1/16" offset from true alignment between adjacent members butting or in line.

2. Maximum 1/4" variation from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

E. Locate end laps over supports; end lap panels minimum 2"; ensure side laps are over firm bearings.

F. Provide expansion joints as required and as recommended by system manufacturer.

G. Use concealed fasteners except where specifically approved by Architect.

H. Completed installation is to be free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 564 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 46 20 - 1 Wood Board Soffits
SECTION 07 46 20

WOOD BOARD SOFFITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide wood board soffits with accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 20 00: Exterior wood trim.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Lumber Standard: PS-20, American Softwood Lumber Standard.

B. General Grading Rules: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) grading rules and inspection.

C. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, 3.1 (NAAWS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods, and locations, fastening methods and locations and installation details.

1. Indicate where exposed fasteners will be required.

B. Samples: Provide samples of wood soffit.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Store materials to prevent warping and weather damage; elevate on level blocking; covering shall permit adequate ventilation.

B. Acclimatize siding to site by storing outside on job site minimum five days prior to installation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.

1. Repair or replace defective wood that fails through corrosion or finish damage because of manufacturing defects.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 565 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 46 20 - 2 Wood Board Soffits
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description Provide board soffits with accessories.

B. Design Criteria: Custom pieces shall conform to North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS).

C. Boards: Tongue and groove board soffits, S1S2E, vertical grain.

1. Board Size: Nominal tongue and groove 2x6 boards unless otherwise indicated.

2. Wood and Grade: Western Red Cedar, minimum WWPA grade marked Clear Vertical Grain Heart, Certified Kiln Dried; for transparent/stained finish; do not use pieces with knots.

D. Nails: Corrosion resistant nonmagnetic stainless-steel siding nails; minimum 10d where over sheathing.

E. Accessories: Provide as required for complete finished installation.

1. Provide components required for complete, finished system; match wood board soffits siding unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install wood soffits over surfaces which are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids.

B. Coordinate installation of soffits with installation of items projecting through; ensure openings are properly sized and located prior to soffit installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS), and as required to match patterns as indicated on Drawings.

B. Avoid face nailing, conceal fasteners when possible.

1. Power Driven Staples: Not permitted.

C. Soffits: Leave slight gap for sealant at trim and corners; stagger joints in subsequent courses.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean marks, debris, and dirt from exposed surfaces of mineral-fiber units using manufacturer recommended cleaning materials and procedures which do not stain nor damage panels or fasteners.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 566 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 60 00 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal
SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide metal flashings and sheet metal including accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

1. Flashing and sheet metal includes copings, fascia panels, scuppers, reglets, and similar fabricated components as applicable to Project.

2. Provide concealed sealants used in conjunction with installation of metal flashing and sheet metal.

3. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal flashing and reglets not provided by other trades or suppliers.
a. Where reglets are to be installed in conjunction with other work, provide in adequate time for installation.

4. Provide precast concrete splash blocks.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 28 00: Concealed flashing at weather barrier/underlayment.

2. Section 07 41 10: Flashing and sheet metal integral with corrugated roofing.

3. Section 07 41 15: Flashing and sheet metal integral with standing seam roofing.

4. Section 08 91 00: Louvers.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish literature for manufactured products.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of typical metal flashing fabrication indicating standard soldered joints and edge conditions.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide strippable film protective covering on shop finished flashing materials to protect materials through shipping, fabrication and installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 567 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 60 00 - 2 Flashing and Sheet Metal

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide flashing and sheet metal including reglets and accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

B. Design Criteria: Allow for movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

C. Flashing and Sheet Metal:

1. Prefinished High-Performance Coated Aluminum: Manufacturer’s standard two coat thermocured fluoropolymer system containing not less than 70-percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; AAMA 2605 and AA-C12C42R1x. a. Manufacturers:
1) Ryerson Building Products (800.328.7800)/AlumaKlad.
2) Merchant & Evans Industries, Inc. (800.257.6215)/Custom. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Thicknesses: 0.032” typical, 0.040” and 0.060” thick where indicated and where recommended by SMACNA for size and shape of flashing and sheet metal. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of nonmetallic colors.
d. Touch-up Paint for Prefinished Sheet Metal: Type recommended by fluoropolymer manufacturer for field touch-up.

2. Accessories: Provide as required for a complete system and complying with SMACNA Manual.

3. Provide heavier gage metal where recommended by SMACNA Manual for size of component.

D. Manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two-piece flashing; metal to match flashing and sheet metal.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System.
b. W.P. Hickman Co./The Leading-Edge Drive Lock System. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 568 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 60 00 - 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal
E. Solder and Fasteners: As recommended by SMACNA and complying with applicable codes and regulations; hot dipped galvanized minimum coating comparable to G90.

F. Concealed Sealant: Butyl type for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior concealed applications.

G. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color; asbestos free.

H. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; asbestos free.

I. Sealing Compound: Type recommended by roofing manufacturer; asbestos free.

J. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete of size and profile as approved by Architect; minimum 2000 psi at 28 days with minimum 5% air entrainment.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

B. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

1. Fabricate corners and intersections in shop with solder joints for watertight fabrication.

C. Form sections in maximum 10'-0" lengths; make allowance for expansion at joints.

D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2".

E. Back-paint flashings with heavy bodied bituminous paint where in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Install tight in place, with corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles as indicated on Drawings.

2. Lap joints in direction of water flow.

B. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

C. Provide expansion joints concealed within system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 569 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 60 00 - 4 Flashing and Sheet Metal
D. Use concealed fasteners, continuous cleat type, except where specifically approved by Architect.

1. Exposed fasteners may be used, where clearly indicated on shop drawings and approved by Architect, at areas not exposed at exterior walls nor in sight of interior spaces.

E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashing and felt flashing.

F. Lock seams and end joints; fit flashing tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

G. Counter-flash mechanical and electrical items projecting through roof membrane.

H. Install sealants where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

I. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

J. Install splash blocks at locations to interrupt fall of water and direct water flow as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coating from shop finished sheet metal when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

B. Touch-up scratched and damaged finish to match new; remove and replace sheet metal units that cannot be repaired to look identical to adjacent sheet metal when viewed from 15'-0" away.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 570 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 84 00 - 1 Firestopping
SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide firestopping as required to maintain effective barrier against spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to retain integrity of time-rated construction as indicated and at following types of locations.

1. Provide at fire rated system perimeters, and at duct, conduit, piping penetrations through time-rated construction, and as required by applicable codes.

2. Coordinate requirements for firestopping with work involving penetrations through fire rated assemblies.

3. Review Project and Contract Documents to ascertain extent of penetrations in fire rated assemblies and methods included in other sections for maintaining fire ratings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 90 00: Non-fire rated joint sealants.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate firestopping with fire rated assemblies and penetrations through fire rated assemblies to ensure compliance with applicable codes and regulations to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

1. Firestopping may be integral with some systems and may be specified as part of other systems including mechanical and electrical systems.

B. Coordination with Acoustical Assemblies: Where a firestopping sealant is required at a penetration of an acoustical assembly, provide a fire-rated acoustical sealant such as Pecora/AC-20 FTR, or Hilti/CP 606.

1. Do not use intumescent firestopping at acoustically rated assemblies.

2. Coordinate with Section 09 21 00 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature including data for materials and prefabricated devices, including descriptions to identify materials and devices on job.

1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings. Approval of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

2. Deferred Approvals: Submit data necessary for applicable authorities for each type of firestopping required including firestopping at fire rated assembly junctures, and penetrations through fire rated assemblies.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 571 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 84 00 - 2 Firestopping
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's installation details.

C. Certificates of Compliance: Submit manufactures’ certificates, accompanied by classifications, indicating material or combination of materials used meets requirements specified for flame spread and fire resistance.

1. Certificates to be supported by test reports by nationally recognized testing authority or otherwise satisfactory to authorities.

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Maintain copy of manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations at each work area.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements relative to finish material pollution control for sealants.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDING
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and store in location providing protection from damage and exposure to elements.

B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. AD Fire Protection Systems/AD Firebarrier Firestopping Materials.

B. Hilti, Corp./Hilti Firestop Systems.

C. 3M Fire Protection Products Div./3M Fire Barrier Products.

D. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)/SpecSeal and Pensil Firestopping.

E. Tremco/Firestopping Products.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide firestopping as required to maintain effective barrier against spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to retain integrity of time-rated construction.

1. Choose products and methods meeting applicable codes and Specification requirements for each firestopping application, subject to Architect's acceptance.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Code, Chapter 7 requirements for firestopping, including both F Ratings and T Ratings as applicable.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 572 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 84 00 - 3 Firestopping
C. Design Requirements: Provide materials tested in accordance with following standards, unless otherwise specified.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. ASTM E119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. c. ASTM E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. d. ASTM E1966, Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

D. Firestopping Materials: Furnish materials for penetrations in time-rated floor, wall, and partition assemblies capable of preventing passage of flame, smoke, and hot gases.

1. Penetration Test: Furnish materials passing ASTM E814 or E1966 for penetration fire stopping indicating maintenance of time-rated adjacent assemblies. a. Additional Tests: Where required by applicable authorities, provide materials passing ASTM E119 time-temperature fire conditions for fire ratings indicated for assemblies.

2. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 flame spread rating of 25 or less.

3. Smoke Developed: ASTM E84 smoke developed rating of 450 or less.

E. Firestopping: Maintain fire rating of assembly in which firestopping is installed, such as floor, partition, or wall, in accordance with ASTM E119 tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until unsuitable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Completely fill void space with firestopping materials regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerances established by firestopping manufacturer.

C. Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes, conduits, and ducts prior to application of insulation.

1. Remove insulation already in place at penetration prior to application of firestopping materials unless insulation meets requirements for fire ratings indicated.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Keep area of work available for inspection by Architect and applicable authorities before and after application of firestopping.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 573 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 84 00 - 4 Firestopping

3.4 REPAIR AND CLEAN-UP
A. Repair damage caused by work of this section; clean exposed surfaces soiled by work and leave work ready to receive following work.

B. On completion of work, remove debris, excess materials, and equipment from site.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 574 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 90 00 - 1 Joint Sealants
SECTION 07 90 00

JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealants, for interior and exterior joints not specified elsewhere, with backing rods and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Joint sealants include joint sealers and calking as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal concealed sealants.

2. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping type joint sealants.

3. Section 08 80 00: Glazing sealants.

4. Section 09 21 00: Sealants used for acoustical treatment at gypsum board.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's descriptive literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of exposed joint sealer in required colors.

C. Certifications:

1. Furnish manufacturer's certification joint sealers comply with Contract Documents and are suitable for Project applications.

2. Furnish certification indicating installers are trained in proper use of specified products, qualified, and familiar with proper installation techniques.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

1. Provide joint sealants as required by applicable codes and regulations to fill joints and openings in building envelope separating conditioned space from unconditioned space.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience on projects of similar type and size, using specified products.

1. Installers shall be familiar with proper application procedures to ensure maximum joint sealer expansion and contraction capabilities.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 575 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 90 00 - 2 Joint Sealants

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, cure time, and mixing instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under unfavorable weather conditions.

B. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is in lower third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.

1. Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining, loss of adhesion, and loss of cohesion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide joint sealants with backing rods and accessories.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Select materials for compatibility with joint surfaces and indicated exposures.

2. Where not indicated, select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.

3. Comply with applicable limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable regulatory requirements regarding limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations.

D. Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Single Component Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; minimum 50% expansion and compaction capability. a. Provide at exterior locations not exposed to traffic. b. Manufacturers:
1) GE (Momentive Performance Materials)/Silpruf, Silglaz or GESIL. 2) Dow/Dowsil 790 or Dowsil 795.
3) Pecora Corp./864 Architectural Silicone.
4) Tremco/Spectrem 3.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 576 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 90 00 - 3 Joint Sealants

2. Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, self-leveling; minimum 25% expansion and compaction capability. a. Provide at traffic bearing locations.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./Urexpan NR-200, or Dynatrol II-SG.
2) Tremco/THC 900-901, or Vulkem 445 SSL.
3) BASF/MasterSeal SL 2
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

3. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, compounded with fungicide, specifically for mildew resistance and recommended for interior joints in wet areas.
a. Provide at interior joints in wet areas.
b. Manufacturers:
1) GE (Momentive Performance Materials)/SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant. 2) Dow/786 Bathtub Caulk.
3) Pecora Corp./898 Sanitary Mildew Resistant Sealant.
4) Tremco/Tremsil 200.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

E. Non-Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C834 acrylic or latex-rubber-modified acrylic sealant, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended for general interior exposure; compatible with paints specified in Section 09 90 00. a. Provide at general interior applications.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./AC-20.
2) Tremco/Tremflex 834.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Air Seals: Provide non-staining and non-bleeding sealers, calks, or foams appropriate to specific applications for filling openings between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
a. Type: As recommended by manufacturer for each specific application; compatible with adjacent materials.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Dow/Great Stuff.
2) Owens Corning/EnergyComplete Air Sealant.
3) Hilti/Foam Filler CF 812.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
c. Pest Control Mesh: Openings subject to pest infiltration to have 304 stainless steel wool, material stuffed in joint before application of air seals using methods to ensure blocking of gap from pests.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 577 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 90 00 - 4 Joint Sealants
d. Exception: Annular spaces around pipes, electric cables, conduits, and other openings in exterior walls shall be protected against passage of rodents by closing with cementitious grout.
1) Cementitious Grout: ASTM C1107 non-shrink, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

F. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Primers/Sealers: Non-staining types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

2. Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of joint sealer.

4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible polyethylene foam rod or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for compatibility with joint sealer.
a. Oversize backer rod minimum 30% to 50% of joint opening.

G. Colors: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with ASTM C1193 and as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint sealer; remove dirt, insecure materials, moisture, and other substances which could interfere with bond of joint sealer.

C. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

D. Ensure protective coatings on surfaces in contact with joint sealers have been completely stripped.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C1193, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.

B. Pest Control: Install stainless steel wool prior to application of backer rods and bond breakers at air seal and as required to ensure complete pest blockage at joints where pest intrusion is a potential.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 578 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
07 90 00 - 5 Joint Sealants
C. Set sealant backer rods at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers and sealant; do not leave voids or gaps between ends of backer rods.

1. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer rods.

D. Install bond breaker tape as required to avoid three-sided bond of sealant to substrate and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure joint sealers will perform properly.

E. Size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

F. Employ installation techniques that will ensure joint sealers are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.

G. Joint Configuration: Fill sealant joint to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture or dirt.

I. Install joint sealers to depths recommended by joint sealer manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead.

1. Horizontal Joints: 75% width with minimum depth of 3/8".

2. Elastomeric Joints: 50% width with minimum depth of 1/4".

3. Non-Elastomeric Joints: 75% to 125% of joint width.

J. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.

1. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.

K. Cure joint sealers in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability.

L. Maintain finished joints free of embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 579 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 10 - 1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
SECTION 08 11 10

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide exterior and interior full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers.

1. Provide hollow metal gate door and framing.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 11 25: Interior aluminum frames.

2. Section 08 35 70: Four-fold meal and glass doors.

3. Section 08 36 10: Aluminum and glass sectional doors.

4. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

5. Section 08 80 00: Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Hollow Metal Manual.

C. Underwriters Laboratories: Standards as applicable to fire rated doors and frames.

1. Materials tested, labeled, and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, configuration, jointing methods, reinforcement, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 580 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 10 - 2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld Building Products Inc.

B. Ceco Door Division Assa Abloy Door Group.

C. Curries Division Assa Abloy Door Group.

D. Door Components, Inc.

E. Republic Doors and Frames.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers.

B. Doors: Hollow metal flush steel door, 1-3/4" thick.

1. Typical: Full flush with steel channel or welded edge; close top with flush end closer treatment, bottom optional flush or recessed channel; steel stiffened core, insulated at exterior doors (insulation not required at gate); continuous welded seam.

2. Interior Doors: Minimum 0.042” (18-gage).

3. Exterior Doors and Gate: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage).

C. Frames:

1. Frames: Welded (pre-assembled) type.

2. Gage: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage) interior frames, 0.067” (14-gage) exterior frames.

3. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement.

4. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 0.026” (22-gage) mortar guard boxes welded in place; provide where frames may be grouted.

D. Glazing Stops: Full flush type with glass centered in opening, unsecured side integral with unit, secured side fastened with flush, countersunk Allen type fasteners; minimum 0.053” (16-gage).

E. Fire Rated Units: Construct in accordance with requirements for fire rating, NFPA 252 or UL 10C, and NFPA 80.

1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors and frames are in installed, opened position.

2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 581 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 10 - 3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Conform to requirements of SDI (ANSI A250 Series) or NAAMM.

B. Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.

1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.

C. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames; continuously weld on inside surfaces (fully welded); grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish.

1. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4'-0" with minimum 0.093” (12 gage) formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.

D. Door Silencers:

1. Place three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike jambs.

2. Place two single bumpers on double door frames; place on frame heads.

E. Provide jamb anchors per SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI 250.8) and NAAMM. Weld floor jamb anchors in place.

F. Provide double doors tested and approved without astragals.

G. Edge Clearances:

1. Between Doors and Frames: Maximum 1/8" at head and jambs.

2. Door Sills (No Threshold): Maximum 1/2".

3. Door Sills (Threshold): Maximum 3/8" above finished floor.

4. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: Maximum 1/8".

5. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire ratings.

H. Finish: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating for primer including application and compatibility with specified finishes.

1. Interior Units: Prime paint.

2. Exterior Exposed Units: Apply minimum A60 non-spangle galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.
a. Surface treat after galvanizing to remove oils and prepare for painting and apply one coat of primer; comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) and ANSI/SDI A250.11 or NAAMM "Hollow Metal Manual" and with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 582 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 10 - 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. Install doors and frames plumb and square within 1/16”, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/32".

C. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage, installation, and construction.

1. Paste filler repair shall not be permitted.

D. After installation, touch-up scratched paint surfaces.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 583 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 20 - 1 Interior Aluminum Frames
SECTION 08 11 20

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum frames for interior doors and glazed partitions, with attachments and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Prepare frames for door hardware.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 08 41 00: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

2. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

3. Section 08 80 00: Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations.

C. Samples: Submit samples of aluminum finish.

1. Submit frame corner construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Wilson Partitions.

B. Western Integrated Materials, Inc.

C. RACO Interior Products.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 584 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 11 20 - 2 Interior Aluminum Frames

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum frames for interior doors and glazed partitions, with attachments and accessories.

B. Interior Aluminum Frames: Knock-down (field assembled) door frames; extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy; profile as indicated.

1. Glazed Frames: Provide extruded aluminum security type snap-in glass stops.

2. Door Stop Gasketing: Provide continuous elastomeric vinyl gasketing at door stop.

C. Anodized Finish: Manufacturer’s standard anodized finish conforming to NAAMM Manual requirements for anodizing, Class I and Class II acceptable.

1. Clear anodized unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter; provide for thermal movement.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit frames in place.

1. Conceal anchorage devices and fasteners.

C. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

D. Provide required internal reinforcing for door hardware.

1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.

E. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

F. Exposed Anodized Surfaces: Apply clear lacquer protective coating, minimum 5 mils dry thickness; conform to AAMA 606.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.

B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level, and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

C. Use anchorage devices to secure and rigidly fasten frame assemblies to building.

D. After installation, touch-up scratched and damaged surfaces; remove and replace damaged frames where touch-up is noticeable from 5’-0” or more.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 585 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 14 00 - 1 Wood Doors
SECTION 08 14 00

WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide flush wood doors as indicated.

1. Contractor Option: Provide shop finished wood doors.

B. Related Work

1. Section 08 11 10: Pressed steel frames.

2. Section 08 11 20: Interior aluminum frames.

3. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards – 3.1, (NAAWS).

B. Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA): Guide Specifications.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Wood Jambs: Coordinate with Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry for prefit wood doors for door jambs.

2. Hardware: Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

3. Glazing: Coordinate glazing with Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

4. Painting: Coordinate with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating whether wood doors are to be shop finished or field painted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, jointing methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

C. Samples: Submit samples of wood doors indicating construction, veneering, and finish.

1. Submit shop finish for wood doors where doors are furnished shop finished.

D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification indicating compliance to applicable requirements of either NAAWS or WDMA Standards; note which standards were followed or if both standards have been met.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 586 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 14 00 - 2 Wood Doors

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations and paints and coatings.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements applicable to Project location.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for replacing, rehanging, and refinishing wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and delamination.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. VT Industries including Eggers.

B. Masonite Architectural including Marshfield and Algoma.

C. Haley Brothers, Inc.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide flush wood doors as indicated.

B. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: NAAWS/Premium Grade, 5 Ply Hot Press, 1-3/4" thick solid wood framed glued block construction or particleboard core five ply construction; Contractor option to use WDMA comparable standards.

1. Transparent/Stained Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Premium Grade veneers for transparent/stained finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.
a. Wood Veneers: Types as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

2. Edges: Stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim.

3. Core: Bond stiles and rails to core and sand prior to assembly of face veneers.

4. Bond Type: Provide Type II Bond for interior doors.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 587 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 14 00 - 3 Wood Doors

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of specified standards.

1. Prefit wood doors.

2. Prepare doors to receive hardware in shop, refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements and templates.

3. Factory machine doors for mortise hardware.

B. Bevel strike edge of single-acting doors, 1/8" in 2".

C. Shop Finished Doors (Contractor Option): Conform to requirements specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, and reference standards, plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16".

B. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are without damage at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Shop Finished Doors: Refinish or replace damaged doors.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 588 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 31 00 - 1 Access Doors and Panels
SECTION 08 31 00

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide access doors and panels as required for access to controls and valves behind finished surfaces with accessories as required for complete finished installation.

1. Provide metal access doors set in finished wall surfaces.

2. Provide glass fiber reinforced access panels for ceiling installations.

3. Coordinate with various trades for controls and valves which may be concealed.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of access doors required but not indicated on Architectural Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide access doors and panels set in finished surfaces.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Where doors and panels are in fire rated assemblies provide assemblies listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building Materials Index" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL label on each rated access door.

2. Materials tested, labeled, and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

C. Metal Access Doors and Panels: Provide access door and panel assemblies consisting of an integral unit with flush metal doors and panels, complete and ready for installation.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Milcor Inc.
b. Nystrom Building Products.
c. J.L. Industries.
d. Karp Associates, Inc.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Non-Fire Rated Units: Flush panel access doors; provide type with frame flange concealed in finished construction.

3. Fire Rated Units: Manufacturer's standard UL rated insulated flush doors with 1" flanged frame and self-closing mechanism.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 589 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 31 00 - 2 Access Doors and Panels

4. Frames: Fabricate from not less than 16 gage metal.

5. Doors: Flush panel type, fabricate from not less than 14 gage metal.

6. Hinges: Provide continuous piano type hinge.

7. Locking Devices: Provide flush, key-operated cylinder lock for each access door; provide two keys per lock and key locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled.

8. Finish:
a. Typical: Finish with manufacturer's factory-applied enamel prime coat applied over phosphate coating on steel.
b. Wet Locations: Provide Type 304 corrosion resistant stainless-steel access doors with No. 4 satin directional finish; door panel texture vertical; frame same direction as long side of frame section.

D. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plaster Access Panels: Provide glass fiber reinforced plaster "GRP" lay-in ceiling access panels.

1. Type: Square corner type with frame designed to be installed into gypsum board ceiling installation with frame taped to adjacent gypsum board ceiling.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Formglas Inc./GRP Lay-In Access Panels.
b. Karp Associates, Inc./FG Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Ceiling Panels. c. Wind-Lock/GFRC Stealth Access Panels.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

3. Provide access panel assemblies consisting of an integral unit, complete and ready for installation with panels flush with finished ceiling, field painted to match ceiling.

4. Provide type with frame flange concealed in finished construction.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.

B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction and grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

C. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of type required for specific job conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed.

1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected; installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 590 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 31 00 - 3 Access Doors and Panels

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for access doors.

1. Install fire rated access doors in accordance applicable code requirements and with requirements of NFPA 80.

B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Adjust hardware and doors after installation for proper operation.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 591 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 1 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors
SECTION 08 35 70

FOUR-FOLD METAL AND GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide four-fold bi-parting steel and glass doors for fire station apparatus bays with electric operators, hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide matching canopy at four-fold metal and glass doors.

2. Provide special lights on doors indicating when door is open (green) and when door is closed (red).

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials.

2. Section 08 36 10: Aluminum and glass sectional doors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations, hardware locations, and relevant details.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish, glass and glazing gasket.

D. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 592 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 2 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failures including wind damage and water penetration to interior surfaces, excessive deflections, and deterioration of finishes, weatherstripping and accessories.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Door Engineering and Manufacturing LLC.

B. Electric Power Door.

C. Jewer’s Doors US. Inc.

D. Bator USA.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide four-fold bi-parting metal and glass doors for fire station apparatus bays with hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories.

B. Performance Criteria Requirements: Conform to ANSI/AAMA 101 for HGD-R20 rating or better.

1. Strength: Design system to withstand wind loads acting normal to plane of walls as required by California Building Code but no less than following minimum requirements:
a. Wind Loads: Minimum 20-psf acting inward and outward. b. Deflection: Maximum L/175, ASTM E330.
c. Safety Factor: Design for specified pressures with no glass breakage, no permanent damage to fasteners, and no permanent deformation of framing exceeding 0.2% of member clear span.

C. Regulatory Requirements, General: Comply with applicable California Building Code load requirements, without breakage, failure of any part, or malfunction of operation.

D. Regulatory Requirements for Glazing: Comply with California Building Code and CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

E. California Title 24 CEC Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of walls.

1. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by authorities necessary to verify conformance.

2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 593 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 3 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors
F. Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors and Canopy: System with profiles as indicated on Drawings; provide security type glass stops of profile to suit frame design.

1. Basis of Design: Door Engineering and Manufacturing/Four-Fold 300XT Glazed Doors as indicated.
a. Where other manufacturer’s standard models do not match above, custom fabrication to match above required.

2. Metal: Manufacturer’s premium quality galvanized steel tubes and sheets; not less than 14-gage.

3. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard PPG/Spectracon epoxy primer with polyurethane topcoat; custom color as directed by Architect.

G. Hardware: Manufacturer’s premium grade hardware for specified four-fold bi-parting door system including hinges, guide tracks, brackets, trolleys, center guides, weatherstripping, and accessories as required for complete operational installation.

H. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required based on window size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Viracon.
b. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
c. Oldcastle Glass.
d. Guardian Industries Corp.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew point.
a. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification Council.
b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including black spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.
a. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass. 1) Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance low e coating, not less than Vitro (PPG)/SolarBan 60, on Number 2 surface. b. Tinted Glass Basis of Design: Viracon Crystal Gray VE-2M#2. 1) Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated or approved in advance by Architect.
c. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 594 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 4 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors
I. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation.

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.

J. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Lights: Provide special lights on doors, green light to indicate door is open, red light to indicate door is closed.

2. Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type that will not cause electrolytic action or corrosion.
a. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly or for application of hardware.
b. Indicate exposed fasteners on shop drawings for specific approval; exposed fasteners shall be Phillips flat-head screws or Allen screws with finish matching item fastened.
c. Provide concealed fasteners for glazing stops.

3. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A123, applied after fabrication.

4. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

5. Anchoring Devices: Corrosion resistant type capable of supporting walls system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place.

K. Electric Operators: Provide operators designed for extra heavy use with constant daily open/close cycles anticipated for fire station application.

1. Operators: UL approved; size appropriate for use at no more than 75% rated capacity; fully enclosed magnetic crossline reversing starter; voltage as indicated on Electrical Drawings.
a. Speed: Not less than 24” per second.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 595 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 5 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors

2. Controls: Programmable logic controller with digital message display or LED indicators with programmable close timers and programmable input/output. a. Provide adjustable limit switches.
b. Provide systems which allows manual operation in case of power failure, but which cannot be operated from outside garage; maximum effort to manually open gates to be 50 lbs.

3. Control Stations: Weatherproof, fully guarded, electrically operated type, for each electric operator; 24-volt circuit; mounted as indicated. a. Control system to be operated by push-button control from inside, and remote control from outside; provide three preset remote-control units per four-fold door assembly.
1) Provide individual door operators located at each door and master control stations at locations shown on Drawings.
2) Safety Devices: Provide as required by applicable codes, including photo electric non-contact reversing control, and electric sensing edges and photo sensors to reverse gate operator.
a) Provide exterior photo sensors in door jambs and interior overhead sensors as approved by Architect.

4. Reversing Contactor: Heavy duty electrically interlocked reversing contactor; safety switch wired to stop or reverse gate upon striking object.

5. Automatic Closing System: Provide operator which is preset to automatically close after predetermined time; timing shall be based on average time for automobiles to pass through gates.
a. Provide system capable of being readjusted in field.

6. Seismic Switch: Provide special P Wave type switch designed to automatically open doors when exposed to an earthquake as acceptable to Owner.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate four-fold door system to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation; provide for thermal movement.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit walls assemblies in place.

C. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

D. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and as required to accommodate design loads.

E. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coating.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 596 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 6 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors
F. Finishing: After fabrication, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendations of aluminum producer and finish manufacturer.

1. Finish components of each assembly simultaneously to attain uniformity of color.

G. Weld by methods recommended by metal manufacturer and AWS; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish; remove arises from cut edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".

H. Fit and assemble work at shop to greatest extent possible; disassemble only as required for shipment and erection.

I. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support.

1. Provide internal reinforcing for hardware.

J. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion.

K. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts that permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joint.

L. Fabricate and apply hardware, disassemble only as required for transportation and installation.

M. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious and with dissimilar materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions; verify rough openings are level, plumb, and square and within wall manufacturer recommended tolerances.

B. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install four-fold door systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet design requirements indicated, for weathertight installation.

B. Ensure doors are plumb, level, and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

1. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location: 1/8" in 12'-0", with maximum 1/2" variation in total length.

2. Maximum Offset Between Members: 1/16".

C. Use anchorage devices to secure and rigidly fasten system to building.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 597 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 35 70 - 7 Four-Fold Metal and Glass Doors
D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates.

1. Install to operate freely and smoothly, with a maximum operating pressure of 5 pounds in accordance with ADA Standards.

E. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and glazing manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean metal and glass surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage.

B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures and cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 598 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 36 10 - 1 Aluminum and Glass Sectional Doors
SECTION 08 36 10

ALUMINUM AND GLASS SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide full-view glazed aluminum sectional overhead doors with frames, glazing, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance, hardware, electric operators, and accessories for complete finished, operational installation.

1. Provide system to suit openings and allowable head room.

2. Provide electrical wiring from make-up box to electrical operator and control wiring to safety devices and control stations.

3. Provide special lights on doors indicating when door is open (green) and when door is closed (red).

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 50 00: Angle and channel frames at door openings.

2. Section 08 35 70: Four-fold steel and glass apparatus bay doors.

3. Section 08 41 00: Entrances and storefronts.

4. Division 26: Electrical service to make-up box on operator.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installation which are not fully detailed on manufacturer's data sheet.

1. Submit setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchorage devices.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of aluminum with required finish.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Door Corporation.

B. Raynor Manufacturing Co.

C. Windsor Door, a United Dominion Company.

D. Clopay Corporation.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 599 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 36 10 - 2 Aluminum and Glass Sectional Doors

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide full-view glazed aluminum sectional overhead doors with frames, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance, hardware, electric operators, and accessories.

1. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corp./Aluminum 521 Series, insulated.

B. Performance Criteria Wind Loads: Design and reinforce doors to withstand not less than 20-psf wind loads.

C. Regulatory Requirements for Glazing: Comply with California Building Code, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

D. Door Sections: 1-3/4" thick, ASTM B221, 6063-T6 extruded aluminum, minimum

0.06" thick.

1. Stiles and Rails: Manufacturer's standard sizes as recommended for door sizes indicated.

2. Solid Panels: Minimum 0.05" thick aluminum face and back sheets finished to match stiles and rails with polyisocyanurate insulated core for maximum U-value.

3. Seals: Provide seals between each door section for weather-tight closure between sections.

4. Finish: Custom color TGIC powder coat finish as directed by Architect.

E. Glass: Provide manufacturer’s standard insulated glass units.

1. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew point.
a. Performance: ASTM E2190 certified by Insulating Glass Certification Council. b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including black spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.
c. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048, Kind FT; safety glass.
d. Tinted Glass Basis of Design: Match Viracon Crystal Gray VE-2M#2 as approved by Architect.
1) Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated or approved in advance by Architect.
e. Total Unit Thickness: 1/2".

F. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation.

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 600 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 36 10 - 3 Aluminum and Glass Sectional Doors

2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.

G. Track: Galvanized track 2" or 3" depending on door size and as recommended by door manufacturer.

1. Tracks: Bracket-mounted or continuous angle mounted and fully adjustable for sealing door to jamb; reinforce horizontal track with continuous angle.

H. Hardware: Hinges and brackets made from galvanized steel; track rollers hardened steel balls of size suited to size of track.

I. Spring Counterbalance: Heavy-duty, 100 thousand cycles, oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball bearing cross header shaft; galvanized aircraft type lifting cables.

J. Weatherstripping:

1. Floor Seal: U-type vinyl seal and extruded aluminum retainer.

2. Header Seal: Neoprene rubber seal held in place by galvanized steel retainer and bolted to top section.

3. Jamb Seal: Neoprene rubber, designed to seal side of door when closed; mounted between jamb and continuous angle mounting.

K. Inserts and Anchorage: Provide complete anchorage system for doors; furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units.

L. Lights: Provide special lights on doors, green light to indicate door is open, red light to indicate door is closed.

M. Electric Operators: Provide operators designed for extra heavy use with constant daily open/close cycles anticipated for fire station application.

1. Operators: UL approved; size appropriate for use at no more than 75% rated capacity; fully enclosed magnetic crossline reversing starter; voltage as indicated on Electrical Drawings.
a. Speed: Not less than 24” per second.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 601 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 36 10 - 4 Aluminum and Glass Sectional Doors

2. Controls: Programmable logic controller with digital message display or LED indicators with programmable close timers and programmable input/output. a. Provide adjustable limit switches.
b. Provide systems which allows manual operation in case of power failure, but which cannot be operated from outside garage; maximum effort to manually open gates to be 50 lbs.

3. Control Stations: Weatherproof, fully guarded, electrically operated type, for each electric operator; 24-volt circuit; mounted as indicated. a. Control system to be operated by push-button control from inside, and remote control from outside; provide three preset remote-control units per four-fold door assembly.
1) Provide individual door operators located at each door and master control stations at locations shown on Drawings.
2) Safety Devices: Provide as required by applicable codes, including photo electric non-contact reversing control, and electric sensing edges and photo sensors to reverse gate operator.
a) Provide exterior photo sensors in door jambs and interior photo sensors in bollards as approved by Architect.

4. Reversing Contactor: Heavy duty electrically interlocked reversing contactor; safety switch wired to stop or reverse gate upon striking object.

5. Automatic Closing System: Provide operator which is preset to automatically close after predetermined time; timing shall be based on average time for automobiles to pass through gates.
a. Provide system capable of being readjusted in field.

6. Seismic Switch: Provide special P Wave type switch designed to automatically open doors when exposed to an earthquake as acceptable to Owner.

N. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and glazing manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install door, track and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.

B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing; hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers as required to meet ASCE 7-10 to account for story drift, welded and bolt-fastened in place.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 602 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 36 10 - 5 Aluminum and Glass Sectional Doors
C. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment.

D. Upon completion of installation, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weather-tight for entire perimeter.

E. Remove and replace damaged glazing, including glazing with scratches.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 603 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 1 Entrances & Storefronts
SECTION 08 41 00

ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems, with stock non-automatic doors, operable vents, hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials.

2. Section 08 11 20: Interior aluminum frames.

3. Section 08 36 10: Aluminum and glass sectional doors.

4. Section 08 71 00: Cylinders for door locks

5. Section 08 71 15: Low energy automatic door operators.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Metal Manufacturers (AAMA): Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual.

B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering for entrances and storefronts to ensure they comply with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations, hardware locations, and relevant details.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish, glass, and glazing gasket.

D. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer or firm with minimum five years successful experience in the installation of systems like those required for Project and approved by manufacturer.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 604 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 2 Entrances & Storefronts

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failures including wind damage and water penetration to interior surfaces, excessive deflections, and deterioration of finishes, weather-stripping and accessories.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Kawneer, an Arconic Company.

B. Oldcastle Building Envelope.

C. Arcadia, Inc.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems, with stock non-automatic doors, hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of applicable codes.

1. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and pass ANSI Z97.1.

C. Regulatory Requirements, California Energy Code: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of aluminum framed storefronts.

1. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by authorities necessary to verify conformance.

2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Comply with requirements of California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards to ensure access to persons with disabilities.

E. Design Criteria: Comply with recommendations of AAMA Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual except where more stringent requirements are specified.

1. Deflection: Maximum L/175, ASTM E330.
a. Safety Factor: Design for specified pressures with no glass breakage, no permanent damage to fasteners, and no permanent deformation of framing exceeding 0.2% of member clear span.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 605 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 3 Entrances & Storefronts

2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration, ASTM E331, with no water on exposed interior components; static pressure differential of 20% of inward wind load, with minimum 6-psf load.

3. Air Leakage: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sf, ASTM E283, at differential static pressure of

6.24-psf at fixed glazing and not more than 0.3 cfm/sf at doors.

F. Performance Criteria: Design assemblies capable of withstanding minimum uniform test pressures as required by applicable codes when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.

G. Aluminum-Framed Entrance and Storefront Systems: Systems with profiles as indicated on Drawings; provide extruded aluminum security type glass stops of profile to suit frame design.

1. Basis of Design: Kawneer/Trifab 451T System with GlassVent operable windows.

2. Aluminum Type: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6061 or 6063 alloy and T5 or T6 temper.

3. Finish, High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x, prepared, pretreated, and coated with minimum two coat Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 system; AAMA 2605.
a. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of colors (non-metallic), where not indicated.

H. Doors, Frames, and Hardware: Barrier-free entry doors meeting code requirements for providing access for people with physical disabilities; by entrance manufacturer.

1. Type: Wide stile, nominal 5” wide stiles and head rail with 12" bottom rail.

2. Metal and Finish: Match entrance system.

3. Hardware: Provide complete hardware system except as indicated; match window wall system finish unless otherwise directed by Architect. Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
a. Hinges: Extra heavy-duty ball bearing full mortise (butt) hinges complying with requirements specified in Section 08 71 00.
b. Closers: Concealed adjustable type closer, maximum 5-pound operating pressure when installed in final application.
c. Push/Pulls: Types as indicated on Drawings; where not otherwise indicated manufacturer's standard types as selected by Architect; match finish of similar hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
d. Security Locks: Manufacturer's standard.
1) Cylinders: Provided under Section 08 71 00.
e. Weather-Stripping, Sweep Strips: Manufacturer's recommended standard type, to suit application.
f. Thresholds: Maximum 1/2" height above adjacent surfaces, with maximum 1/4" vertical section and remainder maximum 1:2 slope.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 606 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 4 Entrances & Storefronts
I. Operable Vents: Provide push-out casement style window with cam lock hardware with two cam locks required for each window.

1. Basis of Design: Kawneer/GLASSvent windows for storefront framing.

2. Screens: Provide full width hinged wicket screens to be used at each operable window.

J. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required based on window size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glass.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Viracon.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew point.
a. Performance: ASTM E2190 certified by Insulating Glass Certification Council. b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction. c. Float Glass (Typical): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".
d. Tempered Glass (Where Indicated and Where Safety Glazing is Required):

Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.
e. Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance low e coating, not less than Vitro (PPG)/SolarBan 60, on Number 2 surface.
f. Tinted Glass Basis of Design: Viracon/Crystal Gray VE-2M#2. Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless indicated or approved in advance by Architect.
g. Opaque Spandrel Glass: Double density ceramic frit, ASTM C1048, Kind HS, heat strengthened spandrel glass; nominal 1/4" thickness. h. Rain Pattern Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, Kind LA, two sheets of select glazing quality clear float glass with 30-mil polyvinyl butyral film, safety glass; laminated layers shall be free of air pockets and foreign substances. 1) Basis of Design: Pulp Studio, Inc./Rain Pattern glass. 2) Provide at Exercise Room and Day Room Balcony doors to obscure view. i. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 607 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 5 Entrances & Storefronts
K. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation.

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.

L. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type which will not cause electrolytic action or corrosion.
a. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly or for application of hardware.
b. Indicate exposed fasteners on shop drawings for specific approval; exposed fasteners shall be Phillips flat-head screws or Allen screws with finish matching item fastened.
c. Provide concealed fasteners for glazing stops.

2. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A123, applied after fabrication.

3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

4. Flashing: Provide sub-sill flashing members; minimum 22 gage sheet aluminum of sizes and shapes indicated and as required to drain water to exterior; match adjacent aluminum member finish.

5. Anchoring Devices: Corrosion resistant type capable of supporting entrance system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront system to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation; provide for thermal movement.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit entrance assemblies in place.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 608 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 6 Entrances & Storefronts
C. Non-Automatic Doors: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards relating to access for persons with disabilities.

1. Clear Opening Width: Minimum 32" clear opening width for each door.

D. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

E. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and as required to accommodate design loads.

F. Allow moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within frame construction to drain to exterior.

G. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coating.

H. Finishing: After fabrication, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendations of aluminum producer and finish manufacturer.

I. Weld by methods recommended by metal manufacturer and AWS; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish; remove arises from cut edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".

J. Fit and assemble work at shop to greatest extent possible; disassemble only as required for shipment and erection.

K. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support.

L. Provide internal reinforcing for hardware.

M. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion.

N. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts which permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joint.

O. Fabricate doors and apply hardware in shop. Disassemble only as required for transportation and installation.

P. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious and with dissimilar materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum framed storefront assemblies, including entrances, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and to meet design criteria and performance criteria indicated, for weather-tight installation.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 609 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 41 00 - 7 Entrances & Storefronts
B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level, and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

1. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location: 1/8" in 12'-0", with maximum 1/2" variation in total length.

2. Maximum Offset Between Members: 1/16".

C. Use sufficient anchorage devices to secure and rigidly fasten assemblies to building.

D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates.

1. Install doors to operate freely and smoothly, with a maximum operating pressure of 5 pounds in accordance with California Building Standards Code.

2. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

3. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers, or gaskets to provide weathertight construction.

E. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and glazing manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

C. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures and cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 610 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware.

3. Gate Hardware.

4. Digital keypad access control devices.

5. Low-energy door operators plus sensors and actuators.

6. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.

7. Door silencers or mutes.

C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.

1. Division 8: Section - Steel Doors and Frames.

2. Division 8: Section - Wood Doors.

3. Division 8: Section - Aluminum Storefront

4. Division 28: Section - Fire/Life-Safety Systems & Security Access Systems.

1.03 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.) A. 2019 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.

B. BHMA – Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. CCR – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards.

D. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 611 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 2

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute

1.04 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information:

1. Include a Cover Sheet with;
a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.

2. Job Index information included;
a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number.
b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted.
c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware.
f. Clarification statements or questions.
g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer’s technical data and instructions.

3. Vertical schedule format sample:

Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number – HW -1) (a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b) 90q (c) RH (d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM
(g) 1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS (m) 626 (n) IVE 2 6AA 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS 626 SCH (a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 612 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 3 Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) - Manufacture abbreviation.

D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.

E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.

F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation and adjustment and maintenance information.

I. Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections.

J. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

To maintain the integrity of patented key systems provide a letter of authorization from the specified manufacturer indicating that supplier has authorization to purchase the key system directly from the manufacturer.

3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.

C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 613 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 4 D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

F. Product packaging to be labelled in compliance with CA Prop 65, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.

B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.

C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.

D. Contractor to inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each all are satisfied that count is correct.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows:

1. Locksets: “L” Series Three (3) years – “ND” Ten (10) years.

2. Electronic: One (1) year.

3. Closers: Thirty (30) years -- except electronic closers shall be two (2) years.

4. All other hardware: Two (2) years.

1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.

B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 614 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 5 C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review District's keying standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney
Locks, Latches
& Cylinders Schlage Or Approved Equal
Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Push, Pulls
& Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Or Approved Equal
Thresholds Zero Pemko, National Guard
Seals & Bottoms Zero Pemko, National Guard

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.

1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.

2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.

B. Continuous Hinges: As manufactured by Ives, an Allegion Company. UL rated as required.

C. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: Schlage "ND" Series as scheduled with "Rhodes" design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 615 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 6

1. Provide cylindrical locksets exceeding the ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 performance standards for strength, security, and durability in the categories below:
a. Abusive Locked Lever Torque Test – minimum 3,100 inch-pounds without gaining access
b. Offset lever pull – minimum 1,600 foot pounds without gaining access c. Vertical lever impact – minimum 100 impacts without gaining access

2. Cycle life - tested to minimum 16 million cycles per ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Cycle Test with no visible lever sag or use of performance aids such as set screws or spacers

3. UL 10C for 4’-0” x 10’-0” 3-hour fire door.

4. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

5. Provide solid steel anti-rotation through bolts and posts to control excessive rotation of lever.

6. Provide lockset that allows lock function to be changed to over twenty other common functions by swapping easily accessible parts.

7. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw capable of UL listing of 3 hours on a 4’ x 10’ opening. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

8. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws.

9. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.

10. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

11. Provide wired electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. a. 12 through 24 volt DC operating capability, auto-detecting b. Selectable EL (fail safe)/EU (fail secure) operating mode via switch on chassis c. 0.230A (230mA) maximum current draw
d. 0.010A (10mA) holding current
e. Modular / “plug in” request to exit switch

12. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides.

D. Schlage “L” Series as scheduled with “06” Style Lever and “A” Style Rose.

1. Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims. Locksets shall also comply with UL10C Positive Pressure requirements

2. Lock case shall be manufactured with heavy 12 gauge steel with fully wrapped design.

Lock cases with exposed edges are not acceptable. Lock case shall be multi-functional allowing transformation to a different function without opening lock case.

3. Latchbolt shall have ¾” throw and be non-handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. Solid latchbolts and / or plastic anti-friction devices are not acceptable.

4. The deadbolt, when used, shall be 1” throw stainless steel with a ¾” internal engagement when fully extended.

5. All trim shall be through-bolted with the spring cages supporting the trim attached to the lock cases to prevent torqueing.

6. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions. Exterior lever assembly to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Interior lever assembly shall be attached by screwless shank

7. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Locks using a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable. Spindles shall be independent, designed to “break-away” at a maximum of 75psi torque.

8. Hand of lock chassis to be changeable by simply moving one screw from one side to the case to the other and pulling and reversing the latchbolt.

9. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Locks utilizing screws and / or stamped retainers are not acceptable.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 616 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 7 E. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.

1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.

2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications.

3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16” steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, holdopen arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation, high strength and long life.

4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw valve.

5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.

6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.

7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.

8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Per 11B-404.2.8.1, door shall take at least 5 seconds to move from an open position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch jamb.

F. Electro Mechanical Automatic Operators: LCN Senior Swing as schedule.

1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI A156.19.
a. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears. b. Closing: Spring force.
c. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted. d. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. e. Cover: Aluminum.

2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors.

3. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

4. Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as specified.

Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications. Provide LCN 8310-836T full length actuators.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 617 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 8

5. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator as required for function as described in operation description of hardware sets.

6. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by Architect.
1) Provide caution signs as described in BHMA A156.19.

G. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures.

1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.

2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.

H. Door Stops:

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners.

Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 11B-307).

3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

I. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges.

Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.

J. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.

1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.

2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.

3. Use ¼” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).

4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.

K. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.

1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252.

Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.

2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.

3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.

L. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at all exterior out-swing doors.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 618 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 9 M. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.

2.03 KEYING
A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center or a local authorized commercial dealer.

B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center.

Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.

C. Establish a new masterkey system for this project as directed by the keying schedule.

D. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys independently (PKI)
E. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.

F. Furnish all keys with visual key control.

1. Stamp key “Do Not Duplicate”.

2. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on key.

3. .

G. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control.

1. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on side of cylinder (CKC).

H. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:

1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.

2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.

3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.

4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.

5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.

6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.

I. Furnish Schlage Padlocks and the cylinders to tie them into the masterkey system for gates, storage boxes, utility valve security, roof hatches and roll-up doors keyed as directed in the keying schedule.

1. Furnish KS43D2200 padlock for use with non-I/C Schlage cylinders. Furnish 47-413 (conventional) or 47-743-XP (PrimusXP) with above.

2. Furnish KS43G3200 padlock for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 23-030 (Classic / Everest) or 20-740 (PrimusXP) with above.

3. Furnish KS41D1200 padlock for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 80-037 (Everest-B) with above.

J. Furnish one Schlage cabinet lock for each cabinet door or drawer so designated on the drawings or keying schedule to match the masterkey system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 619 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 10

1. Furnish CL100PB for use with non-I/C Schlage cylinders.

2. Furnish CL77R for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders.

3. Furnish CL721G for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders.

2.04 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted.

B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630) unless otherwise noted.

C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.

2.05 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.

B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.

C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.

D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.

E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.

F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.

G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that only the manufacturer’s furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) 2016 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 620 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 11 project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.

B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute.

Operating hardware will to be located between 34" and 44" AFF.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.

G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.

H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.

I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.

J. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical Section.

K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function.

L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the manufacturer’s technical documentation.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 621 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 12 proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

3.04 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and as specified herein.

3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.

B. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors, and other movable parts of the building, and establish type and standard of quality, the contractor is responsible for examining the Plans and Specifications and furnishing proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in hardware groups in regard to regular doors they shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening for instruction; otherwise, list will be considered Complete. No extras will be allowed for omissions.

C. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.

Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)
CRO = Crown Industrial Cane Bolts
GLY = Glynn-Johnson Corporation Overhead Door Stops
IVE = Ives Hinges, Pivots, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof Strikes, Push Pull & Kick Plates, Door Stops &
Silencers
LCN = LCN Door Closers
LOX = Locinox Gate Hinge/Closer
SCE = Schlage Electronics Electronic Door Components
SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders
ZER = Zero International Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 622 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 13 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211AL FSE 12/16/24/28

VAC/VDC
630 VON
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR 8310-836T 630 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA VANDL STOREROOM
LOCK
ND96TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 623 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 14 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA VANDL CLASSROOM
LOCK
ND94TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR PEDESTAL

STOP/HOLDER
FS40-43 AS REQ. 626 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
LOCK MUST BE ON DAY ROOM SIDE. FREE EGRESS FROM BALCONY AT ALL TIMES HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06
1 EA HINGE/CLOSER MAMMOTH 180 LOX
1 EA VANDL STOREROOM
LOCK
ND96TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY

GATE FABRICATOR

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 624 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 15 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07
2 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 (TOP BOLT WITH 12"

EXTENSION)
626 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB BLK IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH SRI 689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA ASTRAGAL 43STST STST ZER

VERIFY IF DOOR BOTTOM/GASKETING/THRESHOLD ARE NEEDED SINCE THIS IS AN ALL EXTERIOR DOOR PER THE FLOOR PLANS.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08
2 EA CANE BOLT 524 P23 (WITH PAD LOCK

ASSEMBLY)
(BOTH LEAFS)
CRO

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY

GATE FABRICATOR
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY AL FRAME MFR.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 625 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 16 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12
HARDWARE BY DOOR MFR.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 12" 626 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
2 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA MEETING STILE 44STST STST ZER
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY W/INDICATOR L9056T 06A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CCV 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 15
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY AL FRAME MFR.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 626 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 17 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 17
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY AL FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 350AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 18
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY AL FRAME MFR.
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 350AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 19
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 1
EA
EA

PRIVACY W/INDICATOR

PRIMUS CORE
L9056T 06A L583-363 L283-722
20-740
626
626
SCH
SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CCV 626 IVE
1 EA SEAL BY AL FRAME MFR.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 20
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 627 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) San Carlos Fire Station No. 16 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 18 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 21
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA WIRELESS ELECTRONIC
LOCK
NDE80T RHO BATTERY

OPERATED (PROVIDED BY
DIVISION 28)
626 SCE
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 22
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 1
EA
EA

CLASSROOM LOCK

PRIMUS CORE
ND70TD RHO
20-740
626
626
SCH
SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 628 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 71 15 - 1 Low Energy Door Operators
SECTION 08 71 15

LOW ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories as required for complete operational installation; system to open and close door upon receipt of an actuating signal.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 41 00: Entrances and storefronts, including standard hardware.

2. Division 26: Final electrical connections.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A156.19: Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors Standard.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate low energy door operators with doors, frames, door hardware, and surrounding construction.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and maintenance data.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, materials and finishes, component connections, anchorage methods and locations and hardware; indicate exposed fasteners for specific approval.

1. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and data necessary for proper installation of closers to fabricators of related work and coordinate.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed finish.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience installing door operator units like type specified and acceptable to operator manufacturer.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 629 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 71 15 - 2 Low Energy Door Operators
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Horton Automatics/Series 7000.

B. LCN/4600 Series Electrically Powered Auto-Equalizer.

C. Dor-O-Matic, Inc./Senior-Swing Automatic Operation.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes.

1. Power Failure: Doors shall not exceed 50-pounds force to set door in motion and shall not exceed 5 pounds force for pushing or pulling doors open when force applied to latch side of door.

C. Performance Criteria: Provide operators complying with applicable portions of ANSI A156.19, designed for doors of types indicated to receive operators.

D. System Description: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories as required for complete operational installation; system to open and close door upon receipt of an actuating signal.

E. Low Energy Door Operators: Complete operator system including door operator, controls, and attachment system designed for type of doors indicated and complying with requirements of ANSI A156.19 for low energy power operated door operators.

F. Control: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of flush wall mounted push-button control units where not otherwise indicated.

1. Provide controls on each side of every door with an operator; number, size, type, and location as indicated and as required by California Building Standards Code to ensure access for persons with disabilities.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication: Provide each automatic door operator as complete, shop fabricated unit.

1. Complete the fabrication, assembly, finishing, application of hardware and other work before shipment, to greatest extent possible.

2. Disassemble only to extent necessary of shipment and installation.

B. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning and finishing. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64".

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 630 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 71 15 - 3 Low Energy Door Operators
C. Conceal fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure.

E. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion; separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints.

F. Finish: Match entrance door finish as specified in Section 08 41 00 - Entrances and Storefronts.

G. Special Features:

1. Safety release clutch for obstructed closing and with checking for both opening and closing cycles.

2. Interlocks: Electrical interlocks which prevent operation of doors when locked or latched.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which automatic doors are to be installed; do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for installation of low energy door operators.

B. Set plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or doors and anchor securely in place.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

C. Install complete door operator system including controls, control wiring, and power units.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After operation of completed installation equivalent to three days use, readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety.

B. Lubricate operating equipment.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 631 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 80 00 - 1 Glazing
SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Provide miscellaneous glass and glazing not provided elsewhere including accessories as required for complete installation.
a. Provide glazing for metal doors and frames.
b. Provide glazing for interior aluminum frames.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 35 70: Four-fold metal and glass door glazing.

2. Section 08 36 10: Aluminum and glass sectional overhead door glazing.

3. Section 08 41 00: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts glazing.

4. Section 08 83 00: Frameless mirrors.

5. Section 10 28 10: Metal framed mirrors.

6. Section 10 28 25: All-glass shower doors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of glass and exposed glazing material.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of exposed glazing accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Section includes miscellaneous glass and glazing materials for items typically furnished without glazing and where glazing is not an integral part of the assembly.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

2. Fire Rated Glass: Provide glass identical to glass tested per ASTM E163, labeled, and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to applicable authorities.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 632 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 80 00 - 2 Glazing
C. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glazing.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Locations: Provide at non-fire rated doors and openings as required by applicable codes and federal requirements.

D. Clear Fire Rated, Impact Resistant Glass: Glazing quality, clear fire rated glass, polished both surfaces; nominal thickness 1/4”; UL listed clear fire rated glass; suitable for applications and fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturers:
a. AGC InterEdge Tecnologies/Pyrobel.
b. Technical Glass Products/Pilkington Pyrodur and Pyrostop. c. SAFTI First/SuperLite 20, SuperLite I XL, and SuperLite I XL IGU. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Glazing Materials: Type approved for use in applications indicated for required fire ratings; refer to fire label requirements.

3. Location: Provide at fire rated openings indicated to receive clear fire rated glass. a. Hose Stream Test: Provide appropriate glazing for specific conditions indicated including but not limited to fire rated impact resistant glass required by applicable codes to pass hose stream test.

E. Spacer Shims: Silicone compatible, 50 durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high.

F. Setting Blocks: 70-90 durometer hardness; 4” long by 3/8” thick by 1/4” high standard setting blocks.

G. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, elastomeric one-component silicone glazing sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer for application involved.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Dow.
b. GE Momentive Performance Materials.
c. Pecora Corp.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 633 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 80 00 - 3 Glazing
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate.

B. Apply primer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual and glazing manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

2. Comply with applicable code requirements and NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated openings.

B. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant.

C. Install removable stops with glass centered in space with spacer shims at 2'-0" intervals on both sides of glass, 1/4" below sightline.

D. Sealant Glazing: Fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8" below sightline.

1. Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline; tool or wipe sealant surface for smooth appearance; at exterior locations tool sealant so water is carried away from glass.

3.3 CLEANING
A. At areas subject to potential impact mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures and cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 634 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 83 00 - 1 Frameless Mirrors
SECTION 08 83 00

FRAMELESS MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide frameless glass mirrors with accessories as required for complete installation.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for mirror glass.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of mirror glass with finished edges and corners.

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or signs of distortion.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide frameless mirrors with accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Frameless Glass Mirrors: Mirror quality q1 or q2, clear float glass; 1/4" thick; full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; factory treated and sealed after cutting and finishing.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Guardian Glass.
b. Lenoir Mirror Company, Lenoir, NC.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Edges: Provide edges designed to eliminate cutting potential at edges and corners commonly referred to as arrised edges, as approved by Architect.

C. Mirror Attachment:

1. Bottom Supports: Brite anodized aluminum angles such as Glass Distributors Inc. (301.779.2430)/Brite Anodized Aluminum 3/8” L-Bar Extrusion, provide felt pads for setting mirrors on angles; provide concealed fasteners.

2. Adhesive: Nontoxic type as recommended by mirror manufacturer.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 635 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 83 00 - 2 Frameless Mirrors
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and mirror manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

B. Provide ventilation to coating.

C. Set or trim felt to face of mirror.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after installation.

B. Remove and replace mirrors which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 636 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 91 00 - 1 Louvers
SECTION 08 91 00

LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide extruded aluminum louvers and frames, with screens, attachment hardware, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of louver.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profile of frame, details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing, blade configuration, duct work connection, screens, and percentage of free air opening.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.

D. Certificates: Where performance requirements are included, provide AMCA Certified Rating Seal indicating louvers comply with requirements.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Take site dimensions affecting louvers prior to fabrication.

B. Ensure openings are properly prepared and flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces, finishes and materials from damage during installation of louvers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

B. The Airolite Corporation.

C. Construction Specialties, Inc. (CSI).

D. Nystrom Building Products.

E. Airline Products Co.

F. Ruskin.

G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 637 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 91 00 - 2 Louvers

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide extruded aluminum louvers and frames, with screens, attachment hardware, and accessories.

B. Performance Criteria: Where indicated, comply with specific performance requirements; unit performance ratings determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500 - L.

1. Free Area: Minimum 45% based on 48" by 48" louver.

2. Static Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.15" of water gage at airflow of 1000 fpm free air velocity.

3. Water Penetration: Maximum 0.05 oz/sf of free area at intake airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity.

4. Wind-Driven Rain: Louvers shall achieve a wind-driven rating in conformance with applicable codes and regulations but not less than an A rating on a standard size louver as defined in AMCA 500 - L.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6061 or 6063, temper T5 or T6; minimum

0.08" thick.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, manufacturer's standard alloy; minimum 0.08" thick.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard fabrication for types specified and configurations indicated on Drawings.

1. Type: Extruded aluminum wall louvers, fixed blade mullion type.

B. Bird Screen for Exterior Louvers: Minimum 0.063" diameter wire, 1/2" interwoven square mesh.

1. Wire: Stainless-steel.

2. Frame: Match louver.

C. Fabricate louvers to maximum extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations; clearly mark units for reassembly and installation.

1. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation.

2. Fabricate sill extension, flashings, wall anchors, structural supplementary subframing, and accessories as required for complete system; use same materials as provided for louvers.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 638 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
08 91 00 - 3 Louvers
D. Join frame members and louver blades by welding; maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frame head and sill; maintain uniform appearance.

E. Shop Finished Louvers: Factory finish with fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 and conforming with AAMA 2605; not less than two-coat system.

1. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of nonmetallic colors where not otherwise indicated.
a. Custom color may be required to match other exposed aluminum components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instruction, properly aligned and level.

B. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners of non-corrosive metals to suit materials being encountered and to resist anticipated loads.

C. Coordinate installation method with application of adjacent backing and structural elements, and mechanical work.

D. Set and tie into flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior.

E. Hinge screens for access.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 639 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
SECTION 09 21 00

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, light gage metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, and general accessories for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 21 00: Building thermal insulation.

2. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping.

3. Section 09 30 00: Cementitious backer unit tile substrates.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

B. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for framing, insulation, gypsum board, and acoustical accessories.

B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

B. Level 4 Finish Mock-Up: Provide Level 4 finish mock-up not less than 100 square feet in location acceptable to Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 640 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 2 Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50-degree F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is complete; comply with ASTM C840.

C. Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Co.

B. Georgia-Pacific Corp.

C. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide gypsum board assemblies including gypsum board, light gage metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, and general accessories.

1. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for system.

B. Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified.

1. Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal framing for gypsum board systems.
a. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where tile is indicated.

2. Large Format Tile: Comply with Tile Council of North America (TCNA) requirements for metal framing at maximum 16” on center and for maximum deflection of L/720 where large format tile as defined by TCNA is indicated.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide systems listed in applicable code or by Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) File No's in GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities.

2. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.

D. Framing: Comply with ASTM C754, 20-gage and lighter unless otherwise indicated; provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes.

1. Shaft Walls: Cee-T or Cee-H shaped studs.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 641 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 3 Gypsum Board Assemblies

2. Runners: Match studs.

3. Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped.

4. Channels: ASTM C754.

5. Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and angle-type hangers as required.

6. Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network; recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

7. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

E. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished.

1. Typical: ASTM C1396, Type X, fire rated gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated.

2. First Layer at Double Layer Applications: ASTM C1396 or ASTM C442, Type X, fire rated gypsum backing board.

3. Gypsum Core Board/Gypsum Liner Board: ASTM C442, Type X, 1" thick; mildew and mold resistant.

4. Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Provide at high humidity areas not covered with tile including but not limited to kitchens, bathrooms, showers, laundries, and basements.
a. USG/Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Core.
b. Georgia Pacific/ToughRock Mold-Guard Fireguard X.
c. National Gypsum/Gold Bond XP Fire-Shield Gypsum Board. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

5. Tile Substrates: Cementitious backer units specified in Section 09 30 00 - Tiling.

6. Cementitious Backer Units for Fiberglass Wall Panels and Paneled Shower/Tub Surrounds: ANSI A118.9 aggregated Portland cement with woven glass-fiber mesh on both faces; approximately 1/2" thick; UL rated for fire rated assemblies. a. Manufacturers:
1) National Gypsum Co./PermaBase Cement Board.
2) USG Industries, Durabond Division/Durock.
3) Custom Building Products/Wonderboard.
4) James Hardie Building Products/Hardibacker.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield, UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 642 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies

7. Special High Rated STC Walls: Acoustically enhanced gypsum board designed with special layer of damping material sandwiched between two pieces of gypsum board for additional sound damping; refer to Partition Schedule on Sheet A-531. a. PABCO Gypsum/QuietRock 530 Gypsum Board.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

8. Glass Mat Sheathing: Silicone treated glass mat gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177, Type X, 5/8” thick unless otherwise indicated. a. Manufacturers:
1) Georgia Pacific/DensGlass Gold Fireguard Type X.
2) USG/Securock Glass Mat Sheathing Firecode X.
3) National Gypsum/Gold Bond Brand eXP Fire-Shield Sheathing. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

F. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840.

1. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound.

2. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads.

3. Edge Trim: “J”, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads.

4. Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, ready-mixed or powder vinyl type for topping.

5. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads.
a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal.

G. Acoustical Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required to achieve acoustical ratings indicated.

1. Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or of thickness indicated.

2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board. Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed, nondrying, nonskinning, nonstaining, and nonbleeding where concealed. a. Acoustical Sealant Manufacturers:
1) USG/Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.
2) Tremco/Acoustical Sealant.
3) Pecora/AC-20.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Fire Rated Acoustical Sealant at Penetrations in Fire Rated Assemblies:

Provided in Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 643 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 5 Gypsum Board Assemblies

3. Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch, and telephone boxes in walls with acoustical insulation.
a. Electrical Box Pad Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions:
1) Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads. 2) Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656).
3) Fire rated partition material manufacturers.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Electrical Box Pad Manufacturers for Fire Rated Partitions:
1) Hevi-Duty Nelson (800.331.7325)/Fire Rated FSP Firestop Putty Pads. 2) Specified Technologies, Inc. (800.992.1180)/Fire Putty Pads. 3) Hilti, Corp./Hilti Box Pads.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

H. Fire Rated Assembly Accessories: Provide materials and accessories as required to comply with fire rating requirements of UL, GA or other listing approved by applicable authorities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.

2. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs.

3. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware.

4. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete.

B. Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and steel bracing as required to support ceiling.

2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.

3. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" on center, not more than 6" from perimeter walls.
a. Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 644 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies

4. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24" on center and not more than 2" from perimeter walls.

5. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

6. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of openings.

7. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing.

2. Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. a. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer in double layer applications.

3. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings.

4. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Architect.
a. Provide where system abuts structural elements.
b. Provide at dissimilar materials.
c. Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions.
d. Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet.
e. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings.

5. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths.

6. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

7. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes and feather coats onto adjoining surfaces.

8. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) “Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”. a. GA Level 4 (Typical): Provide three-coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes.

9. Remove and replace defective work.

D. Acoustical Accessories Installation:

1. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 645 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 21 00 - 7 Gypsum Board Assemblies

2. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
a. Metal Framing: One or two beads.
b. Base layer and face layer.
c. Penetrations of partitions.

3. Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and penetrations and sealed with acoustical sealant.

4. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back and all sides of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 646 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 30 00 - 1 Tiling
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide wall tile installations, including large format tile, with accessories, as required for complete installation.

1. Provide cementitious backer unit tile substrate.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 21 00: Metal framing and gypsum board.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

B. ANSI A108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.

C. ANSI A108.11: Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

D. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Large Format Tile and Framing: Tile Council of North America (TCNA) requires framing at large format tile to be maximum 16” on center and for maximum deflection of L/720 where large format tile as defined by TCNA is indicated.

1. Coordinate with framing installation to ensure proper stud spacing and deflection limits are provided at locations where large format tile is indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material for Project.

B. Samples: Furnish each type of tile clearly indicating pattern, coloration, and joints.

1. Color Charts: Submit actual tile sections showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of tile.

2. Prepare two 12" square sample panels of each selected type of tile and grout.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 647 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 30 00 - 2 Tiling

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide heat and ventilation in areas where ceramic tile work is being performed, to allow tile to properly set.

B. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide tile installations with tile, grout, setting materials, and accessories as indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirements, General:

1. Interior Adhered Veneer: Comply with applicable California Code requirements for interior adhered veneer; maximum 20-psf.

C. Tile: Types as indicated which could include ceramic, ceramic mosaic, quarry, paver, porcelain, stone, and glass type tiles.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Dal-Tile Corp.
b. Crossville Tile.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
d. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Color, Style, and Pattern: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of types of tiles indicated where not otherwise indicated
a. Match Architect approved samples.

3. Base and Trim: Provide matching trim pieces, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile as directed by Architect; types as indicated, as selected by Architect where not indicated.

D. Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Laticrete International Inc.
b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Mapei Corp.
e. Parex USA/Mer-Krete.
f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 648 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 30 00 - 3 Tiling
E. Latex-Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant to shrinkage.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Laticrete International Inc.
b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Mapei Corp.
e. Parex USA/Mer-Krete.
f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Color: Match tile unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 aggregated Portland cement with woven glass-fiber mesh on both faces; approximately 1/2" thick; UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

1. Manufacturers:
a. USG Industries, Durabond Division/Durock.
b. National Gypsum Co./PermaBase Cement Board.
c. Custom Building Products/Wonderboard.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield, UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

G. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers but not less than following.

1. Manufactures:
a. Laticrete International Inc./Stonetech.
b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment CeramaSeal.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

H. Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required for complete tile installation for applications indicated.

1. Special Tile Trim Pieces: Provide as indicated on Drawings. a. Manufacturers:
1) Schluter Systems L.P.
2) Blanke Corp.
3) Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 649 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 30 00 - 4 Tiling

2.1 MIXES
A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout as recommended by the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level; comply with TCNA and tile manufacturer recommendations but not greater than following.

1. Thin Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances.

D. Backer Units: Install units in accordance with ANSI A108.11, manufacturer's recommendations, and as required to provide fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, referenced ANSI Standards, and TCNA recommendations for type of substrate and indicated setting method.

1. Complexity of TCNA variations in types of tile installation systems and potential for changes to surrounding conditions during design and construction makes exact listing of potential conditions improbable.

2. Contractor, installers, and manufacturer representatives shall inform Architect where actual conditions are not covered and where providing similar materials and systems do not comply with TCNA or manufacturer recommendations. a. Where specified or similar materials and systems do not comply with TCNA or manufacturer recommendations submit proposed substitutions along with statement substitutions are of comparable quality to specified materials.

B. Following systems shall form the basis of tile installation systems required for Project.

Where Project conditions vary from TCNA and manufacturer recommendations, notify Architect immediately. Where different use similar materials and systems as appropriate.

1. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Cementitious Backer Units: TCNA W244.

2. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: TCNA W245.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 650 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 30 00 - 5 Tiling
C. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways.

1. Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between tile and substrate.

D. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns.

1. Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Corners and Edges: Bullnose tile unless otherwise indicated.

E. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by TCNA Handbook and as approved by Architect.

F. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout.

G. Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting.

I. Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA and as specified.

J. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged, and faulty tile.

3.2 CLEANING AND SEALING
A. Clean tile surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting.

B. Seal tile and grout surfaces where recommended by manufacturer for materials and applications involved; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 651 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 51 00 - 1 Acoustical Ceilings
SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide suspended acoustical ceiling system with exposed suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 21 00: Gypsum board suspended ceiling systems.

2. Divisions 21 through 28: Facilities services for ceiling penetrations.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635: Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

B. ASTM C636: Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

C. ASTM E580: Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and LayIn Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of acoustical ceiling systems with items installed above ceilings to ensure work above ceilings is complete, ceiling space allows for concealed items while allowing required ceiling heights, and building is enclosed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturers' literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work and ceiling finishes, and inter-relation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of exposed grid finish and each type of ceiling unit.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar type and scope; acceptable to manufacturer of integrated acoustical ceiling system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 652 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 51 00 - 2 Acoustical Ceilings

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not install ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested and approved.

1. Do not allow acoustical ceiling units to be exposed to moisture; immediately remove acoustical ceiling units with stains, units with signs of mold, and units with mildew.

B. Allow wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.

C. Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum 60 degrees F and humidity of 20% to 40% prior to, during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. CertainTeed.

C. Rockfon North America, Chicago Metallic Corp.

D. USG Corporation.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide acoustical ceiling systems with exposed suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Seismic Design Requirements: Comply with California Building Code requirements for seismic bracing of ceiling suspension system, and with ASTM E580.
a. Ceiling Struts: Provide struts as detailed on Drawings and as required by code, placed maximum 12'-0" on center in both directions and within 6'-0" of each wall.
b. Slack Wires: Provide safety slack wires, two per fluorescent fixture on diagonally opposite corners and a single wire for each recessed down light.

2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other independent testing laboratory acceptable to applicable authorities.
a. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed: Provide products meeting code requirements for maximum 25 flame spread and maximum 450 smoke developed.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 653 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 51 00 - 3 Acoustical Ceilings
C. Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension system required for type of ceiling units indicated.

1. Exposed Grid System: Narrow 9/16" nominal face width, direct hung, aluminum or steel "T" exposed grid system.
a. Basis of Design: Armstrong/Silhouette XL 9/16”.

2. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung.

3. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, pre-stretched, yield-stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12-gage.

4. Straps, Tubes and Angles: Provide galvanized steel as required to meet state and local requirements for seismic design loads.

5. Structural Class: Minimum heavy-duty system.

6. Edge Molding: Manufacturer's standard angle molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling, with single flange of molding exposed.

7. Finish of Exposed Items: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel.

8. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/360.

D. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264 type and form as indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of panels where not otherwise indicated.

1. Panels: Mineral composition lay-in ceiling panels with reveal edge designed to be compatible with specified suspension system.

2. Texture: Light fissured panels unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Size: 2'-0" by 2'-0", except where otherwise indicated on Drawings.

4. Finish: Standard washable white painted finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips and other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings.

1. Install inserts, clips, and supports where not previously installed and where additional supports are required for complete installation.

B. Measure ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling; do not use less than half width units at borders.

C. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including integral air handling systems, light fixtures, and other systems.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 654 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 51 00 - 4 Acoustical Ceilings

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C636.

1. Coordinate installation of air handling systems and electrical systems integral with integrated acoustic ceiling systems.

2. Finished Ceilings: True to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled, or damaged grid or acoustical units.

B. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/8" in 10'-0".

C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete coordinate location of hangers with other work.

1. Ensure suspension system is located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment which is to be placed after installation of ceiling grid.

D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span required distance.

E. Install ceiling suspension system to resist seismic loads as required by state and local codes, including extra hanger wires and compression supports for ceilings and light fixtures.

F. Hang system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes, and conduit. Where suspension system members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.

G. Do not support lighting fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of fixture causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

1. Support fixture loads independently or provide supplementary hangers located within 6" of each corner.

H. Do not install fixtures so main runners and cross runners are eccentrically loaded; where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.

I. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level, and miter corners.

1. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes.

J. Where required form expansion joints to accommodate movement and maintain visual closure without distorting system.

K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or defects detrimental to appearance and function.

1. Lay directionally patterned units one way with pattern as directed.

2. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 655 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 51 00 - 5 Acoustical Ceilings
L. Install system level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents.

M. Install hold-down clips where required by applicable codes and where ceiling is within 20'-0" of an exterior door.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustment: Adjust sags or twists which develop in ceiling system and replace any part which is damaged or faulty.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 656 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 10 - 1 Resilient Base
SECTION 09 65 10

RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 15: Resilient stair accessories.

2. Section 09 65 40: Linoleum flooring with integral base.

3. Section 09 65 65: Resilient athletic flooring.

4. Section 09 68 00: Carpet edge strips.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each base color and type.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations for site conditions but not less than following; maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

B. Store materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Johnsonite, Inc.

B. Mannington Commercial, Burke Base.

C. Roppe Rubber Corporation.

D. Armstrong World Industries.

E. Flexco Co.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 657 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 10 - 2 Resilient Base

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq. cm or higher.

C. Resilient Base: Conform to ASTM F1861, with premolded end stops and external corners; 1/8" gage; provide coved base at hard floor surfaces, straight base at carpet unless otherwise indicated.

1. Type: Extruded rubber, in rolls.

2. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Color: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors where not otherwise indicated.

D. Primers and Adhesives: Water-resistant nontoxic types recommended by base manufacturer for specified material and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

1. Fit base joints tight and vertical.

2. Maintain minimum measurement of 18" between joints.

B. Miter internal corners; use molded sections for external corners and exposed ends.

C. Install base on solid backing, adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces and fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.

E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8" over 10'-0".

3.2 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 658 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 15 - 1 Resilient Stair Accessories
SECTION 09 65 15

RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient stair accessories including stair treads and stair risers as required for complete finished installation.

1. Provide resilient flooring for landings matching treads unless otherwise indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base.

2. Section 09 65 40: Linoleum sheet flooring.

3. Section 09 65 65: Resilient athletic flooring.

4. Section 09 68 00: Carpet edge strips.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of stair accessory color and pattern selected.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 5 percent moisture content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

D. Store materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Roppe Rubber Corporation.

B. Flexco Division of Textile Rubber Co., Inc.

C. Mannington Commercial, Burke Stairway Systems.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 659 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 15 - 2 Resilient Stair Accessories

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient stair accessories including stair treads and stair risers.

1. Provide resilient flooring for landings matching treads unless otherwise indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq. cm or higher.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Resilient Rubber Stair Accessories: Conform to ASTM F2169, Type TS; provide complete system including stair treads, stair risers and stringer base.

E. Stair Treads: Provide minimum 1/4" gage stair treads for commercial applications, tapered to back edge; straight nose type.

1. Provide 2" integral stripe on treads at upper approach and last treads as required to conform to California Building Code requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

2. Provide epoxy nose filler as recommended by manufacturer tread manufacturer.

F. Risers: Standard 1/8" gage riser.

G. Resilient Flooring at Landings: Match stair treads.

H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns where not otherwise indicated.

I. Edge Strips: Homogeneous rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color as selected by Architect.

J. Subfloor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

K. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by stair accessory manufacturer for specified material and application.

L. Sealer: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and conform to ASTM F710.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 660 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 15 - 3 Resilient Stair Accessories
B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with substrate filler.

C. Clean substrates and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Stair Accessory Installation: Conform to manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Clean substrate.

2. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation; spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of resilient stair accessory before initial set.

3. Set in place, press treads with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion.

4. Install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges where stair accessory terminates.

5. Scribe to walls and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

B. Stair Treads and Risers: Install single piece tread and single piece riser, full width of stair.

1. Fill voids under nosing with epoxy filler.

C. Landings: Install matching resilient flooring at landings unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean and seal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 661 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 40 - 1 Linoleum Sheet Flooring
SECTION 09 65 40

LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide seamless linoleum sheet flooring with integral base and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base.

2. Section 09 65 65: Resilient athletic flooring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Submit each color and pattern selected of each type of flooring and exposed accessory.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Forbo Industries, Inc./Marmoleum.

B. Armstrong Commercial Flooring/Linoleum.

C. Tarkett/Linosom Linoleum.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide linoleum sheet flooring and accessories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 662 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 40 - 2 Linoleum Sheet Flooring
B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq cm or higher.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Marbleized linoleum consisting of oxidized linseed oil and natural resins mixed with wood or corkflour, limestone and pigments, conforming to ASTM F2034.

1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Width: Nominal 6'-6" (200 cm).
b. Thickness (Gage): Nominal 1/8" (0.15” or 3.2 mm).
c. Backing: Jute.

2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns where not otherwise indicated.

3. Welding Rods: Match flooring unless otherwise indicated.

4. Integral Base Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard cove support strips and finished metal top edge strips.
a. Base Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.
b. Top Edge Strip: Type and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of types and colors.

E. Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl, rubber, or linoleum, tapered or bullnose edge, color as selected by Architect to be compatible with flooring.

F. Subfloor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

Product to fully cover structural plywood substrates for smooth level surface.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

G. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; nontoxic types recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified material and application.

H. Sealer: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to ASTM F710 and manufacturer's recommendations for preparation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 663 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 40 - 3 Linoleum Sheet Flooring
B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with subfloor filler.

C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install linoleum sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and installation instructions for type of flooring and substrates indicated.

B. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation.

1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set.

C. Set flooring in place using methods to ensure full adhesion.

D. Lay flooring with minimum seams, with pattern parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

E. Seamless Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Lay out field so last slab ends minimum 6" from wall to allow space for router to operate around room perimeter.

2. After installation of field, dry cut cove pieces and leave in place.

3. Set router so blade cuts groove depth of approximately 3/4 of thickness of material. a. Rout field seams in one direction only, being careful to keep groove centered on seam as closely as possible.
b. Groove cove pieces by laying out flat on floor and routing. c. Spread adhesive for cove pieces and reinstall; roll thoroughly with hand roller.

4. Weld so only small amount of melted bead overflows edges of groove.

5. After seams have been welded and trimmed in one direction, weld seams running in other direction.

F. Integral Cove Base: Provide integral coved base including cove support strip or filler and metal top edge strip; seamless installation with linoleum flooring.

1. Install top edge strip level with floor lines, with tightly butted joints, mitered corners.

2. Use longest top edge pieces available.

3. Maintain minimum measurement of 48" between joints.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 664 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 40 - 4 Linoleum Sheet Flooring
G. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.

I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean and seal floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 665 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 65 - 1 Resilient Athletic Flooring
SECTION 09 65 65

RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient sheet type athletic sheet flooring and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plank direction, border, and joints.

1. Provide complete, detailed lineage layout indicating compliance with official regulations as applicable.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of flooring color and for colors of each type of lineage.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring and for paints and coatings.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing, and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

D. Store flooring materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Ecore International/ECOnights.

B. Roppe Rubber Corporation/Recoil Fitness Flooring.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 666 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 65 - 2 Resilient Athletic Flooring

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient sheet type athletic flooring and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

C. Resilient Athletic Flooring: Provide material in 48” wide rolls.

1. Basis of Design: Ecore/ECOnights.

2. Thickness: 3/8” unless otherwise indicated.

3. Colors: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not indicated.

D. Edge Strips: Homogeneous rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color as selected by Architect.

E. Sub-Floor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

F. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified materials and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and to ASTM F710.

B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified system.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for installation of waterproof underlayment over substrate and for installation of resilient athletic flooring over underlayment for gymnasium appropriate resilient flooring.

B. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

C. Install minimum 1/2 widths at room and area perimeter.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 667 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 65 65 - 3 Resilient Athletic Flooring
D. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

E. Install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges where flooring terminates.

F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

G. Consult with Architect for floor pattern desired in each area.

H. Edge Strips: Install where edge of tile would otherwise be exposed; butt to flooring without gaps; set in adhesive.

3.3 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 668 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 66 20 - 1 Resinous Terrazzo Flooring
SECTION 09 66 20

RESINOUS TERRAZZO FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide epoxy resin thin set terrazzo floor and base, with divider strips, and accessories and including preparation of concrete substrate, curing, grinding, and sealing, as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Terrazzo Technical Data, National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (NTMA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for epoxy resin and manufactured accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate divider strip layouts, control joint strips, base and border strips, and details of abutting items.

C. Samples: Furnish sample panels of each type of terrazzo including divider strip.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Provide written instructions for recommended periodic maintenance.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for coatings.

B. Installer Qualifications: Contractor member of National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (NTMA) or certified to perform work in accordance with NTMA standards.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide heat and ventilation in areas where terrazzo work is being performed.

B. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 669 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 66 20 - 2 Resinous Terrazzo Flooring
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Associated Terrazzo Co., Inc. (South San Francisco).

B. All American Tile and Terrazzo Co., Inc. (Richmond, CA).

C. San Francisco Terrazzo.

D. Member of Western States Terrazzo Association with minimum five years successful experience fabricating specified flooring.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide epoxy resin thin set terrazzo floor and base, with divider strips, and accessories.

1. Basis of Design: All American Tile and Terrazzo Co., Inc.

2. System Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finishes.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq cm or higher.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Epoxy Resin: Comply with NTMA requirements for epoxy resin; provide epoxy resin specially formulated for use in terrazzo floor and base installations.

1. Epoxy Resin Manufacturers:
a. Tec Incorporated/Tuff-Lite.
b. Master Builders Technologies/Morricite.
c. Selby Battersby & Co./Novaclad.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Hardness: Shore D Durometer Hardness of 60 to 85 or Barcol Impressor hardness of 55 to 80, ASTM D1706.

3. Tensile Strength: 4000 psi minimum, ASTM D638 test rate 0.2" per minute using C die as described in ASTM D412.

4. Tensile Elongation: 5% minimum, ASTM D638 test rate 0.2" per minute using C die as described in ASTM D412.

5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 14,000 psi, ASTM D695 Specimen b, cylinder.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 670 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 66 20 - 3 Resinous Terrazzo Flooring

6. Flexural Strength: Yield Strength -6,500 psi minimum Tangent Modulus of Elasticity - 1 x 104, ASTM D790.

7. Linear Shrinkage: Maximum 0.001 inch per inch, Epoxy Resin Formulators Test Method.

8. Abrasive Resistance: Maximum 0.1-gram loss per 5 gallons of silica sand, ASTM D968.

9. Fading Resistance: No discoloration or physical change, ASTM E188.

10. Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects using ASTM D1308, seven-day room temperature by immersion method including the following materials. a. Distilled water, mineral oil, isopropanol, ethanol, 0.025 detergent, 1% soap solution, 10% sodium hydroxide, 10% hydrochloric acid, 30% sulfuric acid, and 5% acetic acid.

E. Chips: NTMA Standards for absorption rate, uniformity, soundness, and abrasion resistance; chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

1. Colors: As required to match Architect approved samples.

F. Divider Strips: 1/8" thick white zinc alloy unless otherwise indicated, with angle or "T" anchoring features as required to meet NTMA requirements for terrazzo system.

G. Accessories: Items as needed to provide complete terrazzo floor system meeting NTMA requirements; exposed items to match divider strips.

1. Elastomeric Membrane: Provide elastomeric membrane with embedded fiberglass fabric reinforcement as recommended by terrazzo manufacturer for underlayment between epoxy mortar bed and terrazzo flooring.

2. Primer: As recommended by epoxy resin supplier.

3. Control Joint Strips: 1/8" thick white matching divider strips, with 1/4" thick resilient filler suitable for floor surface.
a. Filler Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

4. Non-Slip Aggregate: Aluminum oxide granules or similar non-slip material of type to match approved samples.

H. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1.

I. Cleaning, Sealing and Finishing Compounds: As recommended by NTMA and manufacturer for terrazzo use.

1. Ph Factor: Between 7 and 10; types not affecting color or physical properties of terrazzo.

J. Vapor Retarding Floor Sealer for Concrete Substrates: Type as recommended by NTMA or resin manufacturer where moisture content of concrete exceeds acceptable limits.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 671 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 66 20 - 4 Resinous Terrazzo Flooring

2.3 PROPORTIONING
A. Mix and proportion materials for epoxy mortar bed and for resinous terrazzo in accordance with NTMA recommendations and to match Architect's samples.

1. Impact Strength: No sign of chipping or detachment, no indentation, when tested with 2 lb. falling ball on 1/4" thick epoxy floor bonded to concrete and ground to a terrazzo finish.

2. Bond Strength: 300 psi tensile strength with 100% concrete failure, ACI Committee No. 403 Bulletin Title NO.59-43 (Pages 1139 to 1141).

3. Flammability: Self extinguishing with maximum 0.25" extent of burning, ASTM D635.

4. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: Maximum 25 x 10-6 inches per inch per degree F with temperature range of minus 12-degree F to 140-degree F, ASTM D696.

B. Proportions and Mixing: In accordance with resin supplier's recommendations for finishes to match Architect's samples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installing flooring, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation.

D. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete slab free from foreign matter.

B. Apply epoxy-based patching material as required to provide slopes to adjacent finished floor surfaces with minimal vertical rise.

C. Apply vapor retarding floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install epoxy mortar bed in accordance with terrazzo flooring manufacturer instructions and slope as indicated.

B. Install elastomeric membrane over epoxy mortar bed in accordance with terrazzo flooring manufacturer instructions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 672 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 66 20 - 5 Resinous Terrazzo Flooring
C. Comply with NTMA recommendations for proportioning mixes, reinforcing, installation of strips, and for placing terrazzo.

1. Comply with epoxy resin manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for preparing substrate and application of epoxy terrazzo mix.

D. Install stop and divider strips in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings; take care to provide true lines and patterns as indicated.

E. Install control joint strips as indicated.

F. Prepare and prime concrete subfloor according to resin supplier's instructions.

G. Place terrazzo mixture and trowel to level surface, uniform 3/8" thick.

H. Seed trawled surface with additional chips in same proportions as contained in terrazzo mix and trowel.

I. Produce terrazzo finish surface to match samples, with minimum of 70% marble chips exposed.

1. Provide slip-resistant aggregate as required to achieve surface acceptable to applicable authorities for non-slip surface.

J. Finish: Follow NTMA recommendations for finishing including rough grinding, grouting, curing grout, fine grinding, cleaning and sealing.

1. Rough Grinding: Rough grind with 24 or finer grit stones or comparable diamond plates and follow with 80 or finer grit stones.

2. Grouting: Clean and rinse floor, remove excess rinse water and machine or hand apply grout with identical color cement and pigment and in identical proportions used in topping.
a. Take care to completely fill voids.

3. Fine Grinding: Fine grind with 100 or finer grit stones until grout is removed from surface, disclosing 70% to 75% of marble chips.

4. Cleaning and Sealing: Clean after grinding and allow surface to thoroughly dry; apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Use clean water and stiff bristle fiber brushes to clean terrazzo flooring.

B. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage terrazzo.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished floor until Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or replace flooring system, including dividers, damaged prior to Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 673 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 68 10 - 1 Tile Carpeting
SECTION 09 68 10

TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base for carpeted areas.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, submit manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate carpet tile layout, direction of carpet tiles, adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet tile, and installation procedures.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each carpet tile type and color, and of each color of edge strip.

D. Certificate of Compliance: Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating each material delivered conforms to Specifications.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, furnish carpet tile manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.

F. Maintenance Materials: Submit unused carpet tiles. Box unused carpet tiles and mark boxes indicating color and location installed.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for carpet systems and adhesives.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in carpet tile installation and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. Upon request, submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable.

C. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 12' by 12' mock-up of carpet tile for approval prior to beginning installation; approved mock-up may be incorporated into finished installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 674 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 68 10 - 2 Tile Carpeting

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not commence carpet tile installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceiling and other overhead work has been tested, approved and completed, unless specifically approved.

B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation; relative humidity shall be approximately that at which area is to be maintained.

C. Schedule, receive, and place carpet tile on floors indicated; protect from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and installation.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for promptly making good or replacing defective materials or workmanship. Repairs shall take place within ten days of written notification.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Patcraft Commercial.

B. Mohawk Industries Including Mohawk, Lee and Bigelow Carpets.

C. Shaw Commercial Carpets.

D. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Carpet tiles shall have passed following fire and smoke tests.

1. DOC-FF-1-70: Pass.

2. ASTM E662 (Smoke Denveloped): 450 or less.

3. ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): 0.45 or higher.

C. Design Criteria: Provide carpet materials that bear Carpet and Rug Institute “Green Label Plus”.

D. Performance Requirements, Static: Carpet tile shall develop less than 3.0 kilovolts of static at 70 degrees F and 20 percent relative humidity.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 675 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 68 10 - 3 Tile Carpeting
E. Carpet Tile: Types as indicated on Finish Schedule; where carpet tile is not indicated provide as directed by Architect based on following criteria.

1. Yarn: 6.6 or later generation continuous filament soil hiding nylon.

2. Face Weight: Minimum 30 oz. per square yard.

3. Tile Size: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of carpet tile sizes where not indicated.

4. Pile Height: Maximum 1/2”.

5. Backing: Integrated polyurethane cushion; no latex backing permitted.

6. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide to inhibit growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew.

7. Soil-Resistant Treatment: Manufacturer’s standard integral stain resistance.

8. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors and patterns where not otherwise indicated.

F. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet tile manufacturer to suit application and expected service.

G. Leveling and Ramping Material: Latex-cement material designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

H. Edge Strips: Metal transitions as indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Schluter Systems L.P.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

I. Accessories: Provide as required for complete finished installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet tile; allow floors to thoroughly dry.

B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10 feet.

C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.

D. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for ramping to provide finished carpet tile within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 676 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 68 10 - 4 Tile Carpeting
E. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Adhere tiles to subfloor unless otherwise approved.

B. Prime substrate if required and as recommended by manufacturer. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet tile before initial set.

C. Lay carpet tile with run of pile in direction of anticipated traffic; do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.

1. Finished installation to provide monolithic carpet tile appearance as approved by Architect.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.

E. Fit carpet tiles snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces, leaving no gaps.

F. Lay installation tight and flat to subfloor well fastened and uniform in appearance; ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.

G. Edging Strips: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.

2. Use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.

H. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpet tiled surfaces for not less than 24 hours or until adhesive is set.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of carpet tile installation in each area, visually inspect carpet tile installed in that area and immediately remove dirt, soil and foreign substance from exposed face.

B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Inspect adjacent surfaces and remove marks and stains caused by carpet tile installation.

D. Remove packaging materials, carpet tile scraps, and other debris from carpet tile installation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 677 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 77 30 - 1 Fiberglass Wall Panels
SECTION 09 77 30

FIBERGLASS WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide glass fiber reinforced polyester resin fabricated wall panels with trim pieces and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide at apparatus bay, storage areas, turnout, Janitor Closets, and as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 26 20: Protective wall covering.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling: Schedule installation of wall paneling as late in construction schedule as possible to prevent damage during construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate design parameters, adjacent construction, materials, dimensions, thickness, fabrication details, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support and anchorages.

C. Samples: Furnish fiberglass wall panels and exposed trim.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Include manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods, including precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to pollution control for adhesives.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store panels in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at minimum 40-degrees F with normal humidity.

1. Do not store in upright position.

B. Take precautionary measures with adhesives and solvents to prevent fire hazards.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 678 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 77 30 - 2 Fiberglass Wall Panels

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60-degrees F three days before and during application period.

B. Provide continuous ventilation during work and after installation of wall covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Crane Composites/Glasbord.

B. Nudo Products, Inc./Fiber-Lite Panels or Marlite/Enduro FRP Panels.

C. Stabilit America/Glasteel FRP Liner Panel.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide glass fiber reinforced polyester resin fabricated wall panels, with trim pieces and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire-Rating: Class III (UL Class C), maximum 200 flame-spread, 450 smoke developed, ASTM E84.

2. Wet Wall Applications: Provide system acceptable by applicable authorities for use on walls in toilet rooms including at locations adjacent to water closets and urinals.

C. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panel system acceptable for use as toilet room wall panels, adjacent to water closets and to urinals; ASTM D5319.

1. Thickness: 0.090" nominal thickness.

2. Antibacterial, Mold, and Mildew: Provide panels with integral antibacterial additive and which are mold and mildew resistant.

3. Surface: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of surface textures.

4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors and textures.

D. Trim Pieces: Manufacturer's standard matching moldings and trim pieces as required for complete, finished installation, and as required for joints, corners, and panel edges; suitable for applications indicated.

1. Color: Clear anodized aluminum.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 679 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 77 30 - 3 Fiberglass Wall Panels
E. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application and complying with applicable limitations for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

1. Surface: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of surface textures.

F. Primer: Provide non-staining nontoxic release coat primer as recommended by wall panel manufacturer where panels are applied to gypsum board.

1. Primer: Type designed to allow removal of wall paneling from gypsum board without damaging paper facing of board, and without premature separation of wall paneling from wall.

G. Mechanical Fasteners: Concealed type only; types as recommended by system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Ensure surfaces to receive wall paneling are clean, true and free of irregularities, do not commence with work until surfaces are satisfactory.

B. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Handle and install wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Cope and miter trim pieces.

C. Securely adhere panels to wall surfaces; use blind nailing methods as required to support panels until adhesive dries; exposed mechanical fasteners shall not be acceptable.

1. Install panels in maximum size increments available.

D. Remove excess adhesive from edges and wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel.

E. Install wall paneling before installation of plumbing, bases, hardware, and similar accessories.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean panel system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.

C. Replace accessories.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 680 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 1 Painting and Coating
SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.

1. Specified surface preparation, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shoppriming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

2. Painting and finishing include field finishing of exterior and interior items not listed as "Surfaces not to be Painted" unless clearly indicated otherwise.

3. Painting and finishing include field finishing of select shop finished items such as mechanical grilles and registers and shop primed items such as access panels and louvers in doors, to match adjacent surfaces.
a. Match adjacent surfaces in color and sheen unless otherwise indicated.

4. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, ducts, and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces.

5. Wood Doors: Contractor option to factory finish or field finish, coordinate with Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.

B. Surfaces Not to be Painted:

1. Finished items including finished metal surfaces.

2. Walls and ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas.

3. Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical units.

4. Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint.

5. Plastic smoke stops and weather-stripping at doors.

C. Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various Specification sections.

1. Section 09 96 70: High performance coating for exterior steel.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Brush-Outs: Submit samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions, on hardboard.
a. Submit 8" by 10" samples of wood finishes on actual wood surfaces; label and identify each as to location and application.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 681 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 2 Painting and Coating

2. Field Samples: Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work. a. Size: Minimum 100 sf located where approved.
b. Components: One full component as directed.
c. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Furnish certificates from each manufacturer stating materials are top quality lines and suitable for intended use on this Project.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. Name of material, color, and sheen.

2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.

3. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

4. Thinning and application instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between 50 and 90-degrees F.

B. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified.

D. Provide additional temporary ventilation during interior application of paints to eliminate volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions from interior spaces as quickly as possible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Benjamin Moore & Co.

B. Sherwin-Williams Co.

C. PPG Paints.

D. Dunn-Edwards Corp.

E. Kelly Moore Paint Co.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 682 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 3 Painting and Coating

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.

1. Definition: "Painting" and “coating” as used herein means systems including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, and fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Furnish materials approved for use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic compounds for architectural or special coatings as applicable.

C. Material Quality: Provide top line quality commercial grade (professional painter) paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as their top line product shall not be acceptable.

1. Primers: Provide premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer for substrates indicated and for finish systems specified.

2. Undercoats and Barrier Coats: Provide undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and use only within recommended limits.

3. Finish Coats: Provide finish coats capable of being washed with mild detergent without loss of color, sheen, or pigments.
a. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.

4. Finish Coat Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.
a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.
b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.
c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and prime as required.
d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

D. Colors and Finishes: Prior to commencement of painting work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.

1. Use of proprietary names in color selection is not intended to imply exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

3. Colors: As indicated on Finish Schedules, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 683 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 4 Painting and Coating
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied.

1. Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any area.

2. Where exposed items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned in Schedules, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas.

3. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable paint film.

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

C. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying paint; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.

E. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances; sandpaper smooth surfaces exposed to view and dust off.

1. Scrape and clean seasoned knots and apply thin coat of recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat.

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler and sandpaper smooth when dry.

F. Ferrous Metals: Touch up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged using same type of primer as applied in shop or barrier coat compatible with finish paint.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using nonpetroleum-based solvent; primer and touch-up primer to be zinc-rich primer.

G. Mix painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

H. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

I. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 684 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 5 Painting and Coating

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color, and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention during application to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only.

4. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as faces.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

7. Sand lightly between coats when recommended by system manufacturer.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

1. Opaque Finishes: Provide opaque, uniform finish, color, and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

2. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Produce glass smooth surface film of even luster; provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage; remove, refinish, or repaint work not accepted.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 685 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 6 Painting and Coating

3.3 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal: High-performance coating specified in Section 09 96 70.

2. Opaque Finished Wood: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Primer undercoat.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Exterior 100% acrylic enamel.

3. Natural Finish Wood: Flat sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Exterior clear penetrating wood sealer and preservative.

B. Interior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Systems: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings, semigloss sheen at restrooms, kitchen, toilet rooms, and as indicated. a. 1st Coat: Universal primer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex or acrylic latex emulsion.

2. Metal: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.

3. Opaque Finished Wood: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Primer undercoat.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.

4. Stained Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Wood stain.
b. 2nd Coat: Sanding sealer.
c. 3rd and 4th Coat: Acrylic modified urethane.
d. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 2nd coat.

5. Transparent Finished Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Bleached shellac.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Acrylic modified urethane rubbing varnish. c. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 1st coat.

C. Sheens: Comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of paint.

1. Flat: 1-10.

2. Satin: 15-30.

3. Eggshell: 30-45.

4. Semigloss: 45-75.

5. Gloss: 75-100.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 686 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 90 00 - 7 Painting and Coating

3.2 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each workday.

1. Clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 687 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 96 70 - 1 High-Performance Coating
SECTION 09 96 70

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide high-performance coating system of urethane over epoxy primer as indicated, including surface preparation, priming and high-performance coating application.

1. Location: Provide high-performance coating at exterior steel unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate priming with exterior steel specifications.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 09 90 00: Standard painting and coating systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, including coating label analysis and application instructions for each material.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Provide samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions.

C. Certificates: Provide certificate from each manufacturer stating material is top quality line and suitable for intended use on this Project.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five years successful experience in application of high-performance coating systems of type specified and acceptable to manufacturer of coating system.

C. Mock-Up: Duplicate finish of approved samples in field at location as approved by Architect, one complete component or approximately 100 square feet, for approval prior to commencing work.

1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. Name of material, color, and sheen.

2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.

3. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

4. Thinning and application instructions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 688 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 96 70 - 2 High-Performance Coating

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply high performance coating when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between manufacturer recommended temperatures.

B. Do not apply high performance coating in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85-percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of high-performance coating including peeling, chipping, rusting of substrate, cracking, delamination, chalking, and loss of color and sheen.

1. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 10 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. DuPont Co. Maintenance Finishes.

B. Tnemec Company, Inc.

C. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide high performance coating system of urethane over epoxy primer as indicated, including surface preparation, priming and highperformance coating application.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Provide materials complying with applicable air quality management requirements for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations.

C. Special Coating: High build acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic polyurethane over compatible epoxy primer as recommended by coating manufacturer and suitable for applications indicated and based on quality of following products.

1. Systems:
a. DuPont/Imron with 25P primer.
b. Tnemec/Endura-Shield II (Series 1075) with Series V69 epoxy primer. c. PPG/AmerShield VOC with Amerlock 2-400 primer.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 689 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 96 70 - 3 High-Performance Coating

2. Special Coating System: Provide specific primer and coating as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, conforming to specified requirements. a. 1st Coat: Epoxy primer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: High-build acrylic polyurethane or high-build polyurethane.

3. System Requirements:
a. Abrasion: ASTM D4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load, no more than 95 mg. loss after 1000 cycles.
b. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 Method B (Crosshatch Adhesion), coating applied to sandblasted steel and cured 30 days at 77° F, minimum rating of 5 on average of three tests.
c. Humidity: ASTM D4585, no blistering, cracking or delamination of film after 1000 hours exposure.
d. Salt Spray (Fog): ASTM B117, no blistering, rusting, cracking, or delamination of film; maximum 1/8" rust creepage at scribe after 1000 hours exposure. e. UV: ASTM G154, no blistering, cracking, or chalking, less than 35% gloss loss and less than 3.5 MacAdam unit color change after 1500 hours exposure.

4. Coordination: Provide special coating system compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.
a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints and zinc-rich touchcoatings up are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems. b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.
c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Reprime with zinc-rich primer where galvanized. d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

D. Colors and Finishes:

1. Prior to commencement of coating work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated; custom colors may be required.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

3. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.

4. Sheen: Gloss; comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of coating, 75-100.

E. Material Quality: Provide primers produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by coating manufacturer and use only within recommended limits.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 690 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 96 70 - 4 High-Performance Coating
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which high performance coating work is to be applied.

1. Start of high-performance coating work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any area.

2. Do not apply coating over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable coating.

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

C. Remove items in place and not to be coated or provide protection prior to application of high-performance coating; after application of coating reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying high-performance coating; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly coated surfaces.

E. Metal Preparation: Comply with coating manufacturer recommendations, but not less than following requirements.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using nonpetroleum-based solvent.

3. Painted Surfaces: Clean surfaces of loose paint, dirt, and foreign substances by mechanical cleaning; feather edges of existing paint to provide smooth, even substrate for high performance coating.

F. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

G. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of coating in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

H. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply high performance coating in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and coating material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until coating is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 691 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
09 96 70 - 5 High-Performance Coating
B. Scheduling: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or prepared for high performance coating as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until coating feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials and colors.

1. Provide opaque, uniform finish, color, and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples and mock-up for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not accepted.

3.3 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded coating materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each workday.

1. Clean glass and coating-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and refinishing, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Coating" or "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of coating operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces and defaced coated surfaces.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 692 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 1 Signage
SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide general signage as indicated complete with attachment devices and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 44 00: Fire extinguisher cabinet graphics.

2. Section 14 42 10: Elevator graphics.

3. Division 26: Photoluminescent exit signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and indicate each sign type, style, color, and method of attachment.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish listing of sign types, lettering, and locations, along with dimensions of each sign.

1. Computerized Output: Furnish computerized samples of signs and graphics at full scale duplicating final appearance.

2. Dimensional Letter Signs: Furnish complete shop drawings regarding fabrication and method of attachment of dimension letter signs.

C. Samples: Furnish full size samples where requested.

D. Certification: Furnish manufacturer certification that photoluminescent egress path markings and signage conform to California Building Code requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package separately or in like groups of names, labeled as to names enclosed; include installation template, attachment system and installation instructions.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 693 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 2 Signage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. ASI Modulex, ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

B. Mohawk Sign Systems.

C. Vomar Products, Inc.

D. Manufacturers listed for specific signs.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide signage as indicated with attachment devices and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide signs for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.

1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Code.

2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. General: Provide signs as indicated on Drawings, specified in this Section, and required by applicable codes and regulations but not furnished under other sections.

D. Self-Illuminating Address Sign: Provide LED backlit address number sign as indicated.

1. Basis of Design: Surrounding Modern Lighting & Interiors (310.342.0402)/ Luxello Modern 8” Backlit LED Numbers.

E. Dimensional Letter Signage: Provide individual letter signs as indicated.

1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs. a. Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1.

2. Fabrication: Fabricate dimensional letters as indicated, of minimum 0.25" plate or casting with edges and corners smooth and finished to match adjacent metal finishes.

3. Attachment: Secure letters using connections concealed after installation; method subject to Architect approval.
a. Take care back welding does not damage exposed sign surfaces.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 694 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 3 Signage
F. Toilet Room Door Signs: Provide door signs conforming to California requirements for signs for toilet rooms; concealed mounting system.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs; color as indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.
a. Texture: Smooth.

2. Total Thickness: 0.25".

3. Provide signs required by California Code of Regulations Title 24. a. Men's Room: 12" equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up. b. Ladies' Room: 12" diameter circle.
c. Unisex Toilet: 12" diameter circle with equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up, superimposed on the circle; circle and triangle each 0.25" thick. 1) Color of triangle shall contrast with color of circle which shall contrast with color of door face.

4. Colors: As selected to contrast with doors.

5. Symbols: As selected from manufacturer's standard symbols.

6. Adhesive: Type as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of substrate involved.

G. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Provide signs conforming to California Building Code and ADA Standards for signs for permanent rooms, with inset symbols and with raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs; color as indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.
a. Texture: Smooth.

2. Comply with California Building Code and ADA Standards for raised and Braille characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements.

H. Stairway Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs in stairways, conforming to California Building Standards Code, Section 1022.9.

1. Lettering: Type as required by CBC.

2. Colors, Size, and Style: Conform to referenced code requirements and as approved by Architect.

3. Information: Identify stairway, indicate whether there is roof access, floor level, and upper and lower terminus of stairway, and story of and direction to exit discharge.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 695 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 4 Signage

4. Provide raised five-pointed star located to left of identifying floor level at exit discharge level.

5. Provide Floor Identification Signs required by CBC including both tactile and Braille sign.

6. Provide photoluminescent egress path marking and signs as required by California Building Code for high rise buildings and as specified for photoluminescent egress markings and signage.

I. Parking Signs: Provide aluminum signs with vinyl reflective coating and with text and symbols meeting requirements of California Building Standards Code and with ADA Standards.

1. At entry to parking provide state required sign indicating unauthorized vehicles parking in accessible parking spaces may be towed at owner's expense using exact wording required by CBC.

2. Verify location and telephone number of location vehicle is to be towed with Owner; place this information as permanent part of sign wording.

3. At parking spaces provide California required reflectorized sign, minimum 70 sq. inches, with symbol indicating accessibility.

4. At van accessible parking spaces provide required "VAN PARKING" signs.

5. Provide additional parking signs as indicated on Drawings.

B. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs, conforming to California Building Code Section 1013.4 and ADA Standards for signs for permanent rooms, with tactile raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect.

2. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Provide signs conforming to California and ADA Standards for permanent signs, total thickness 0.125"; provide raised and Braille characters conforming to California and ADA Standards; concealed mounting.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs; color as indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.
a. Texture: Smooth.

2. Sizes and Styles: As indicated on Drawings, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 696 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 5 Signage
D. Tactile Emergency Evacuation Signs: Silk-screened polycarbonate with screening on back and with tactile and Braille information conforming to California requirements and ADA Standards.

1. Information: Provide sign system with information as required by applicable authorities for emergency egress.

2. Silk-Screen Colors: As selected by Architect.
a. Silk-screen Lacquer: Match Advanced Screen Products/Industrial Gloss Lacquer Silk-screen Ink; colors as selected by Architect.

3. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings and acceptable to applicable authorities.

4. Attachment: Method subject to Architect approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, free from distortions and defects.

B. Dimensional Letter Signage: Locate dimensional letters with spacing based on fullsize computer-generated installation drawings secured to structure as required to resist anticipated loads.

1. Final Location: As approved in field by Architect based on full size drawings.

C. Toilet Room Door Signs: Install signs on doors after doors are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs with centerline of sign between 58" and 60" height as required by applicable code.

2. Install centered and level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

D. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Install signs on walls after surfaces on which they are to be mounted are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door.

2. Install level, in line, in accordance with California Building Code and ADA Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 697 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 14 00 - 6 Signage
E. Stair Signs: Install signs inside stairwell after walls are finished, at locations immediately adjacent to door on strike side as required by referenced code, readily visible when door is open.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes.

F. Parking Signs: Provide mounting hardware, including painted posts, as needed; mount signs at heights required by state code.

1. Install parking entry sign at location as directed by Architect.

G. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Install at doors with lighted “EXIT” signs; apply after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door.

2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADA Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

H. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Install signs after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door for room identification signs, where indicated for direction signs.

2. Install signs level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, California Building Code and ADA Standards.

3. Install room identification signs at doors to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

4. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

I. Emergency Evacuation Signs: Install signs after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at locations indicated, as directed by Architect and applicable authorities if not otherwise indicated.

2. Install signs level and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of applicable authorities.

3. Clean and polish.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 698 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 21 35 - 1 Solid Polymer Shower Wall Panels
SECTION 10 21 35

SOLID POLYMER SHOWER WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide solid polymer manufactured shower wall panels for use in showers with shower pans with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 40 00: Solid polymer countertops.

2. Section 10 21 35: Solid polymer shower wall panels.

3. Division 22: Plumbing including manufactured shower pans.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate design parameters, adjacent construction, materials, dimensions, thickness, fabrication details, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support and anchorages.

C. Samples: Furnish solid polymer shower wall panels and exposed accessories.

1. Submit samples of corners and exposed perimeters.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Include manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods, including precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces.

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store panels in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at minimum 40 degrees F with normal humidity.

1. Do not store in upright position.

B. Take precautionary measures with adhesives and solvents to prevent fire hazards.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 699 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 21 35 - 2 Solid Polymer Shower Wall Panels

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60 degrees F three days before and during application period.

B. Provide continuous ventilation during work and after installation of wall covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. DuPont Co./Corian 3-Wall Shower Surround.

B. Avonite Inc./Avonite Wet Wall Panel System.

C. Formica Corp./Surell Shower Surround Panels.

D. Chemcore Industries/Dovae Shower Panels.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide solid polymer manufactured shower wall panels for use in showers with shower pans with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Provide system acceptable by applicable authorities for use on wet walls in showers.

2. Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Panels: Solid polymer panel system designed specifically for use as shower wall panel system with manufactured shower pans.

1. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard, not less than nominal 1/4” thickness.

2. Fire-Rating: Class III (UL Class C), maximum 200 flame spread, 450 smoke generation, ASTM E84.

3. Surface: Smooth surface unless otherwise indicated.

4. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.

D. Trim Pieces: Manufacturer's standard matching moldings and trim pieces as required for complete, finished installation, and as required for joints, corners and panel edges; suitable for applications indicated.

E. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard nontoxic, waterproof adhesive suitable for substrates indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 700 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 21 35 - 3 Solid Polymer Shower Wall Panels
F. Primer: Provide non-staining nontoxic release coat primer as recommended by wall panel manufacturer where panels are applied to gypsum board.

1. Primer: Type designed to allow removal of wall paneling from gypsum board without damaging paper facing of board, and without premature separation of wall paneling from wall.

G. Mechanical Fasteners: Concealed type only; types as recommended by system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Ensure surfaces to receive wall paneling are clean, true, and free of irregularities, do not commence with work until surfaces are satisfactory.

B. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Handle and install wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Cope and miter trim pieces.

C. Securely adhere panels to wall surfaces; exposed mechanical fasteners shall not be acceptable.

1. Install panels in maximum size increments available.

2. Provide for manufacturer’s standard “seamless” installation matching approved samples.

D. Remove excess adhesive from edges and wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel.

E. Install wall paneling before installation of plumbing, bases, hardware, and similar accessories.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean panel system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.

C. Replace accessories.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 701 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 26 10 - 1 Stainless Steel Corner Guards
SECTION 10 26 10

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards, including mounting adhesive and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Babcock-Davis, Inc.

B. In-Pro Corporation.

C. Construction Specialties, the CS Group.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards, including mounting adhesive and accessories.

B. Corner & End Wall Guard: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish; not less than 18-gage.

1. Size: 3-1/2" by 3-1/2" by 80" high unless otherwise indicated.

2. Size: 2” by End Wall Width by 80” high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Custom U-Shaped Guards: Match corner guards in materials and finish; sizes as indicated on Drawings.

D. Attachment: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive for type of wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install stainless-steel corner guards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, straight and true to line.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 702 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 26 20 - 1 Protective Wall Covering
SECTION 10 26 20

PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide protective wall covering consisting of fabricated wall panels, wainscot, inside trim, and formed outside trim, with color matched joint sealer for vertical joints and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 77 30: Fiberglass wall panels.

2. Section 10 21 35: Solid polymer shower wall panels.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling: Schedule installation of protective wall covering as late in construction schedule as possible to prevent damage during construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate design parameters, panel, trim, and sealant layout, adjacent construction, materials, dimensions, thickness, fabrication details, tolerances, and locations of trim.

C. Samples: Furnish protective wall covering, each type of trim, and sealant.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Include manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods, including precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store panels in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at minimum 40 degrees F with normal humidity.

1. Do not store in upright position.

B. Take precautionary measures with adhesives and solvents to prevent fire hazards.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60 degrees F three days before and during application period.

B. Provide continuous ventilation during work and after installation of wall covering.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 703 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 26 20 - 2 Protective Wall Covering
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Construction Specialties, Inc. (C-S Group)/Acrovyn.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide protective wall covering consisting of fabricated wall panels, wainscot, inside trim, and formed outside trim, with color matched joint sealer for vertical joints and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements for low or no-volatile organic compound (VOC) emission materials.

C. Protective Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard high impact PVC-free wall covering.

1. Basis of Design: Construction Specialties, Inc./Acrovyn 0.60N with matching wainscot, vertical, inside and outside trim including factory-thermoformed outside corners for adhesive mounting.

2. Thickness: 0.060" nominal thickness.

3. Fire-Rating: Class I (UL Class A), maximum 25 flame spread, 450 smoke generation, ASTM E84.

4. Surface: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of surface textures.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

D. Trim Pieces: Manufacturer's standard matching moldings and trim pieces as required for complete, finished installation, and as required for joints, corners, and panel edges; suitable for applications indicated.

E. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard nontoxic, waterproof adhesive suitable for substrates indicated.

F. Primer: Provide non-staining nontoxic release coat primer as recommended by wall panel manufacturer where panels are applied to gypsum board.

1. Primer: Type designed to allow removal of protective wall paneling from gypsum board without damaging paper facing of board, and without premature separation of wall paneling from wall.

G. Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard color-matched calk designed specifically for use with specified panel system.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 704 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 26 20 - 3 Protective Wall Covering
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Ensure surfaces to receive protective wall panels are clean, true, and free of irregularities, do not commence with work until surfaces are satisfactory.

B. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install protective wall paneling before installation of plumbing, bases, hardware, and similar accessories.

B. Handle and install protective wall panels, trim, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

C. Securely adhere to wall surfaces.

D. Install panels in maximum size increments available for configurations indicated.

E. Remove excess adhesive from edges and wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel.

F. Seal vertical joints in accordance with manufacturer recommendations for application indicated using color matched sealant and with smooth uniform surface.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean panel system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.

C. Replace accessories.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 705 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 28 10 - 1 Toilet and Bath Accessories
SECTION 10 28 10

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide toilet and bath accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in frames as required for complete, operational installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 80 00: Frameless glass mirrors.

2. Section 10 21 35: Hardware for toilet partitions, including coat hook/bumper mounted on partition doors, and wall bumpers for outswinging doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data illustrating each accessory at large scale.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in.

B. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

C. Pack accessories individually, protect each item and its finish.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this section.

B. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to installation or operation of units.

C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period:

1. Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or distortion.

2. Period: Two years.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 706 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 28 10 - 2 Toilet and Bath Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

B. Bradley Corporation.

C. American Specialties, Inc.

D. Manufacturers listed on Toilet and Bath Accessories Schedules.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide toilet and bath accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in frames.

1. Provide standard materials and finishes for accessories listed; where more than one material or finish is available and not otherwise indicated provide as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes.

B. Regulatory Requirements - Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, commercial grade, Type 304, gages as standard with manufacturer of specified items.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.

E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, q1 mirror select clear float glass with full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; minimum 1/4" thick.

F. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled stretcher leveled; minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

G. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement as recommended by accessory manufacturer.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dipped galvanized; as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

I. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing and supply.

1. Provide minimum six keys to Owner representative.

2. Coin Operated Units: Provide locked coin box keyed separately from standard units, coin operated units keyed alike.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 707 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 28 10 - 3 Toilet and Bath Accessories
B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

C. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and access panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where possible.

D. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.

E. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists for physical contact.

F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent electrolysis.

G. Hot-dipped galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

H. Assemble components in shop; package complete with anchors and fittings.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, number 4, satin finish; satin chrome finish acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item listed or scheduled.

B. Concealed Surfaces: Treat and clean, spray-apply one coat primer and baked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate.

B. Install true, plumb, and level, secure and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners.

D. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly.

E. Replace damaged and defective items.

F. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels.

3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 708 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 28 25 - 1 All-Glass Shower Doors
SECTION 10 28 25

ALL-GLASS SHOWER DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide frameless all-glass shower doors with hardware and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter joint sealants and back-up material.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate elevations and details of construction.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of glass edge finish and metal finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. California Shower Door Corporation.

B. Cardinal Shower Enclosure.

C. The Majestic Shower Co.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide all-glass shower doors with hardware and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements - Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

C. Frameless All-Glass Shower Doors: Manufacturer's standard products as matching conditions indicated on Drawings.

1. Exposed Metal Finish: Chrome on brass finish.

D. Doors: Securely anchor connections; maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 709 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 28 25 - 2 All-Glass Shower Doors
E. Glass: Clear glazing quality, fully tempered safety glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT; not less than 3/8” thick.

F. Glazing Materials: Manufacturer standard type to suit locations and applications.

1. Installation: In accordance with GANA Glazing Manual; glass shall not touch metal.

G. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other material compatible with materials and meeting design requirements.

1. Conceal fasteners wherever possible; where exposed, use flat head countersunk fasteners, finished to match aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions.

B. Installation of frames signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and anchor various components to allow for expansion and contraction, maintaining watertight condition at joints.

B. Install door unit in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

C. Field assembly and joining shall conform to requirements specified for shop fabrication.

D. Install work plumb, straight, square, level and in their proper elevation, plane, and location, and in proper alignment with other work.

E. Anchor securely in place, separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from corrosion and electrolytic action with other materials.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 710 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 44 00 - 1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide semi-recessed cabinets for portable fire extinguishers with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Owner furnished and installed.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 21: Fire protection systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries.

B. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.

C. Potter Roemer.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide semi-recessed cabinets for portable fire extinguishers with accessories.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Provide semi-recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated, maximum 4” extension beyond wall finish surface, provide trim suitable for installation indicated.

1. Type:
a. J.L. Industries/Ambassador Series.
b. Larsen’s Mfg. Co./Architectural Series.
c. Potter Roemer/Alta Series.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Size: Provide cabinets designed to house 4A-60BC multi-purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher at locations indicated on Drawings.

C. Trim: Manufacturer's standard edge trim for specified models.

D. Metal Gages: Provide manufacturer's standard gages for cabinets specified.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 711 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 44 00 - 2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
E. Construction: Mitered and welded one-piece tubular door frames; weld joints and grind smooth; manufacturer's standard steel box with white baked enamel interior finish and primed exterior finish.

1. Steel Doors and Trim: Manufacturer's standard, prime coat finished.

2. Latch: Manufacturer’s standard latch allowing free-opening of doors.

3. Door Hardware: Continuous hinge permitting door to open 180-degrees.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguisher cabinets are to be installed.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets in locations and at mounting height to comply with requirements of governing authorities; prepare recesses in walls as required.

B. Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. After installation and finishing is completed, silk screen or apply decal letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" as applicable.

B. Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 712 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 51 05 - 1 Fire Station Metal Lockers
SECTION 10 51 05

FIRE STATION METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide special fire station type heavy duty metal lockers as indicated with hooks, attachment hardware, and accessories as indicated and as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker types, sizes, configurations, details, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, color and finish, and numbering.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces and materials from damage or marring during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Penco Products, Inc.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide special fire station type heavy duty metal lockers with hardware and accessories for complete installation as indicated.

1. Basis of Design: Penco Products/Stadium Fully Framed Lockers.

B. Lockers: Welded construction, type as indicated.

1. Size: 24” wide by 21” deep by 72” high.

C. Steel: Commercial quality, zinc-coated, carbon sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A924 and A653, with minimum A60 (ZF 180) or G 60 (Z 180) coating designation.

D. Fittings: Manufacturer's standard fittings for locker types indicated.

E. Accessories: Provide security box footlocker.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 713 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 51 05 - 2 Fire Station Metal Lockers

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Finish edges smooth without burrs.

B. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with surfaces flat and free of dents and distortions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Take site dimensions affecting this work, ensure preparatory work is properly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, secure, plumb, level, square, and in line.

B. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces; touch-up marred finishes and replace lockers which cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dirt, and paint; do not allow lockers to be used during construction.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 714 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 55 00 - 1 Locking Mailbox
SECTION 10 55 00

LOCKING MAILBOX
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide surface mounted locking mailbox with accessories as required for complete installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of mailbox.

1. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details. Show anchorages and accessory items. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction.

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification equipment proposed conforms to U.S. Postal Service regulations and has been approved by Postmaster General.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Provide products of manufacturers approved by U.S. Postal Service when mail system is serviced by U.S.P.S.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. QualArc (888.800.0153).

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide surface mounted mailbox with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with U.S. Postal Service requirements for construction and installation of units serviced by U.S.P.S. carriers.

C. Mailbox: Provide horizontal front-loading style mailbox; comply with USPS standards.

1. Basis of Design: QualArc/Allux LT150 Locking Wall Mount Mailbox.

2. Size: 15-3/8” wide by 13” high by 5-7/8” deep.

3. Finish: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of finishes where not otherwise indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 715 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 55 00 - 2 Locking Mailbox

4. Locking: Furnish 5-pin tumbler cylinder lock capable of at least 1000 key changes, with 5 keys.
a. Deliver mailbox keys directly to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors, and installation of postal specialties units.

B. Final acceptance contingent upon compliance with U.S. Postal Service requirements.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 716 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 75 00 - 1 Metal Flagpoles
SECTION 10 75 00

METAL FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide embedded ground set cone tapered aluminum flagpoles with concealed internal halyard system, revolving truck, pulleys and fittings, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of pole, anchor requirements, all components, and sizes.

C. Samples: Submit pole finish, indicating polish, texture, and color.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in shipping tubes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Morgan Francis Flagpoles and Accessories.

B. American Flagpole, Division of Kearney-National Inc.

C. Concord Industries, Inc.

D. John Ewing & Co. Inc.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide embedded ground set cone tapered aluminum flagpoles with concealed halyard system, revolving truck, pulleys and fittings, and accessories.

B. Performance Criteria: Flagpole system shall resist 90 mph wind velocity without permanent deformation, and non-resonant.

1. Comply with NAAMM Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 717 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
10 75 00 - 2 Metal Flagpoles
C. Flagpoles: One-piece, cone tapered aluminum poles; conforming to NAAMM Metal Flagpole Manual.

1. Type: Embedded ground mounted type (minimum 4'-0" setting depth).

2. Nominal Height: 25'-0".

3. Outside Diameter: 5" at butt.

4. Wall Thickness: Minimum 0.125".

D. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear satin anodized aluminum.

E. Foundation Base: Embedded type concrete construction.

B. Flash Collar/Base: As indicated; where not specifically indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard flash collars and ornamental bases.

F. Internal Halyard System: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel aircraft cable system, revolving truck with stainless steel ball-bearings, non-fouling, heavy duty winch with locked flush access door.

1. Provide bronze snap hooks.

2. Provide rubber covered counterweight.

3. Provide braided sling.

4. Provide two removable crank handles.

G. Lightning Ground Rod: Minimum 10" long copper rod, 3/4" diameter.

H. Lightning Ground Cable: Copper No. 6 AWG stranded, soft drawn.

I. Asphaltic Paint: Bituminous coating, black color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install concrete foundations for flagpoles correctly sized and positioned.

B. Coat portions of flagpole below grade and in contact with dissimilar materials with asphaltic paint.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Ground flagpole installations.

C. Check and adjust installed fittings for smooth operation.

D. Instruct Owner's representative in maintenance and operation.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 718 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
11 31 00 - 1 Residential Appliances
SECTION 11 31 00

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide residential type appliances with options and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 40 00: Custom cabinets and countertops.

2. Division 22: Plumbing connections.

3. Division 26: Electrical connections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each type of appliance, including data indicating compliance with requirements and color selection.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification Labels: Provide appliances which bear appropriate labels as follows:

1. Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission.

2. UL Standards: UL labels required.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver appliances in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces are ready to receive them.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. General Electric Co., Major Appliances Division.

B. Whirlpool Corp.

C. Maytag Corp., including Amana Appliances.

D. Manufacturers listed on Appliances Schedule.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide residential type appliances with options and accessories.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 719 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
11 31 00 - 2 Residential Appliances
B. Performance Requirements: Provide appliances with Energy Star rating unless otherwise indicated.

C. Appliances: Provide as indicated listed on Appliance Schedule.

1. Options: Where appliances are available with options and options are not specifically indicated provide best quality options offered with appliance number indicated unless otherwise directed by Architect.

2. Colors and Finishes: Provide colors and finishes as indicated for appliances. a. Where not otherwise indicated provide finishes as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes including stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which appliances are to be installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades as necessary for proper service connections.

C. Ensure operating parts work freely and fit neatly.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts as necessary.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect appliances until Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, or other defects affecting appearance or serviceability, so appliances are undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 APPLIANCE SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 720 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 24 00 - 1 Window Shades
SECTION 12 24 00

WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manual chain operated window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

1. Solar Shades: Unframed.

2. Blackout Shades: Side framed.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

B. FS CCC-T-191b: Flame Retardancy of Textiles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Show hardware, clearances, and shade operation.

1. Layout of openings, partings, and pulley positions subject to Architect approval where not clearly indicated.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each fabric indicating finishing of top, bottom and sides, and section of frame indicating finish.

D. Certificate of Flame Proofing or Flame Resistance: Submit certification, recommendations, and instructions for laundering of specified fabrics and maintenance of entire installation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide manual shades as complete units produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver shades until building is ready for installation.

B. Number and identify shades as to locations in Project.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Measure space before installation after limiting conditions are established.

1. Note floor and ceiling may not be level.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 721 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 24 00 - 2 Window Shades
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Mecho Shade Corporation/Mecho Shade System.

B. Lutron Electronics Co./Manual Shading.

C. SKYCO Shading Systems, Inc./Manual Shades.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide manual chain operated window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Flame Retardant Materials: Approved by California State Fire Marshal's Office.

2. Fire Resistant Fabrics: Required to have passed one of following:
a. NFPA 701.
b. FS CCC-T-191, test 5903.

3. Accessibility: Provide systems in compliance with California and ADA requirements for ensuring access for persons with disabilities.

C. Shade Operating System: Manual type chain operated roller shade system with adjustable slip clutch.

1. Shade Type MS-1.1: Wall mounted manual roller shade Mecho Shade/Mecho5 Slim Pocket single roller blind shade with WS-1 Solar Shade Cloth.

2. Shade Type MS-1.2: Above ceiling mounted manual roller shade Mecho Shade/ Mecho5 Slim Pocket single roller blind shade with WS-1 Solar Shade Cloth.

3. Shade Type MS-1.3: Wall mounted manual roller shade Mecho Shade/Mecho5 Slim Pocket single roller blind shade with WS-2 Solar Blackout Cloth.

4. Shade Type MS-1.4: Inside window frame mounted roller shade Mecho Shade/ Mecho5 Cable Guided, single roller blind shade with WS-1 Solar Shade Cloth, no fascia.

D. Fabric:

1. Solar Shades: Manufacturer's standard fire-resistant glass cloth fabric.

2. Blackout Shades: Manufacturer's standard blackout shade system where indicated.

3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Side Channels: Provide side channels for blackout shades; no sill channels.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 722 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 24 00 - 3 Window Shades
F. Accessories: Provide accessories, brackets, fittings, and fastenings as necessary for proper operation and installation of shades; conceal fasteners or finish flush, painted to match exposed metal finish.

G. Exposed Metal Finish: Manufacturer's standard white painted finish as approved by Architect.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Center Seams: Use single widths of fabric with no center seams for each shade.

B. Shade Mounting System: Allow for shade removal and replacement without disassembling hardware assembly.

C. Operating System: Provide upper and lower stop limits to prevent over-winding and unrolling.

1. Provide for left or right-hand operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect site conditions prior to installation for conditions that could affect proper installation and operation of shades.

B. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install shades level, plumb, secure, and at proper height; cooperate with other trades for securing shades to substrate and finished surfaces.

B. Hang shades to be straight and even, employing hand sewing of seams and hems as necessary for carefully matched installation with even, horizontal top and bottom hems, and quiet, smoothly operating system.

C. Fabricate and install shades so when open, closed or while operating shades will not be abraded by window frame, ceiling, or sill.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Thirty days after hanging of shades, inspect installation for fabric shrinkage or expansion or other variations and rehang as necessary for conformance to specified tolerances.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 723 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 48 00 - 1 Entry Floor Mats
SECTION 12 48 00

ENTRY FLOOR MATS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide carpet surfaced recessed entry floor mats with recessed metal frames and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 12 48 10: Recessed stainless-steel entry floor mats (grilles).

2. Division 22: Drainage.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish large scale drawing of total assembly, showing anchorage.

1. Provide templates or units to job site in time for installation in concrete subflooring.

C. Samples: Furnish sample of floor mat in style and finish specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Mats Inc.

B. Balco, Inc.

C. Construction Specialties, Inc. (CS).

D. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Section Includes: Provide carpet surfaced recessed entry floor mats with recessed metal frames and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 724 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 48 00 - 2 Entry Floor Mats
C. Entry Floor Mat:

1. Basis of Design: Mats Inc. (800.628-7462)/ Calypso Tile as indicated on Drawings.
a. Carpet: Manufacturer's standard 100% solution dyed UV stabilized polypropylene carpet.
b. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.

D. Recessed Frame: Extruded aluminum; mill finish.

E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc chromate primer or similar protective coating for surfaces in contact with concrete and dissimilar materials.

F. Anchors and Accessories: As required for complete, secured assembly.

G. Edge Strips: Match Schluter/Reno-U transition strip or aluminum reducer strip at recessed walk-off mats per details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

1. Set to allow entry floor mats to be flush with adjacent finish floor.

B. Install entry floor mats and true to line, flush with adjacent floor finishes.

C. Anchor entry floor mats to frame with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer and as required to comply with requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 725 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS MILPITAS FIRE STATION # 2
12 48 15 - 1 Recessed Entry Grilles
SECTION 12 48 15

RECESSED ENTRY GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide stainless steel recessed entry grilles with flush frames and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 12 48 00: Entry floor mats with carpet surface.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Include large scale drawing of recessed entry grille system.

1. Provide templates or frames to job site in time for installation in subflooring.

C. Samples: Submit sample of grille and section of frame.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Mats, Inc. (800.628.7462)/Ultra Track.

A. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum recessed entry grilles with flush frames and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

C. Entry Floor Mats (Grilles): Nominal 1" thick aluminum recessed entry grille with maximum grille opening width of 3/16".

D. Recessed Frame: Satin finished aluminum frame to match grille.

E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc chromate primer or similar protective coating for surfaces in contact with concrete.

F. Anchors and Accessories: Types as recommended by manufacturer and as required for complete, secured installation.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 726 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS MILPITAS FIRE STATION # 2
12 48 15 - 2 Recessed Entry Grilles
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install frame in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings; set to allow entry grilles to be flush with adjacent finish floor.

B. Install entry grilles level and true to line, flush with adjacent finished floor surfaces.

C. Anchor grilles to frame with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 727 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
12 93 50 - 1 Bicycle Racks
SECTION 12 93 50

BICYCLE RACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide bicycle racks as indicated including accessories as required for complete, secure installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction, materials, dimensions, thicknesses, fabrication details, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support and anchorages.

C. Samples: Submit sample of metal finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide stainless steel bicycle racks indicated.

B. Bicycle Racks: Manufacturer’s standard materials and construction as indicated and as follows.

1. "Circle" Type Bicycle Racks: Flange mounted square steel tube construction. a. Pilot Rock, RJ Thomas Mfg. Co./Omega Bike Rack.
b. Columbia Cascade/CycLoops Circulo 2170-3-04.
c. Dero, A Playcore Company/Arc Rack.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Finish: Provide not less than G90 galvanized steel prime painted. Coordinate prime painting with Section 09 96 70 – High Performance Coating.

C. Accessories: Provide non-shrink, nonmetallic grout appropriate for applications indicated for embed mounting of bicycle racks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Handle and install bike racks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Set bike racks secured to construction, level and true to line, in correct relationship to adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 728 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
14 42 10 - 1 Enclosed LU/LA Wheelchair Lift
SECTION 14 42 10

ENCLOSED LU/LA WHEELCHAIR LIFT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide enclosed limited use, limited application (LU/LA) wheelchair lifts (elevator) with accessories as required for complete operational installation.

1. Verify alternative methods for complying with specified code minimums for head space and pit depths are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating.

2. Division 26: Electrical service, disconnect switch, final electrical connections.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME A18.1: Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chair Lifts.

B. ANSI A17.1: Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Escalators, and Moving Walks.

C. ANSI C1/NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.

D. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

E. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, and Part 7 Elevator Safety Regulations.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and equipment description.

B. Shop Drawings: Show complete layout of platform, clearances, location of power unit and controls.

C. Samples: Submit samples of finish for color selection.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Minimum of five years experience in installation of lifts of type specified and approved by system manufacturer.

B. Installation Supervision: Manufacturer's representative shall supervise installation of wheelchair lift.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 729 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
14 42 10 - 2 Enclosed LU/LA Wheelchair Lift
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Garaventa Lift.

B. ThyssenKrupp Access.

C. Symmetry Elevating Solutions.

D. Butler Mobility Products.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Section Includes: Provide enclosed limited use, limited access (LU/LA) wheelchair lifts with accessories as required for complete operational installation.

B. Accessibility Regulatory Requirements: Provide for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.

1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Standards Code.

2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of ANSI A17.1.

D. Enclosed Wheelchair Lift: Drawings are based on fully enclosed limited use, limited access lifts for individuals with disabilities.

1. Basis of Design: Garaventa/Elvoron Lift, holeless hydraulic system.

2. Platform Size: Not less than 12 sq. ft.; provide larger platform where permitted by applicable regulations and where required for lift configuration.

3. Capacity: Not less than 750 lbs.

4. Speed: Approximately 30 fpm.

5. Travel: Heights as shown.

6. Motor: Not less than 1/2-HP.

7. Control: Momentary contact call-send control from landing and operation from platform. Comply with applicable code requirements.

8. Standby Power: Provide lift with self-recharging battery power that provides power to operate platform lift functions for minimum of five upward and downward trips.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 730 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
14 42 10 - 3 Enclosed LU/LA Wheelchair Lift
E. Emergency Signaling: Comply with accessibility regulatory requirements, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3142.1 and ASME A18.1 Chapter 2, Section 2.11.

1. If platform is installed in an area not visible to personnel at all times provide emergency signaling devices in accordance with following requirements. Standby power shall be required.

2. Provide platform with an audible signaling device, operable from emergency stop switch, marked also with "ALARM" or from a separate switch marked "ALARM", located in or adjacent to each platform operating panel. a. Switch marked "ALARM" shall illuminate when actuated. b. Signaling device shall be audible inside platform and outside runway. c. Audible signaling device shall have rated sound pressure rating of not less than 80-dBA nor greater than 90-dBA at 10'-0" and respond without delay after switch has been activated.

3. Provide lift with means of two-way conversation between platform and readily accessible point outside runway which is available to emergency personnel (telephone, intercom, etc.).
a. Means to activate two-way conversation system does not have to be provided on platform.

4. If audible signaling device(s), or means of two-way conversation, or both, are normally connected to building power supply, they shall automatically transfer to source of standby or emergency power as required by applicable building code, or, where applicable, comply with Standard for Health Care Facilities (ANSI/NFPA 99) after normal power supply fails.
a. Power source shall be capable of providing for operation of audible signaling device and illumination of alarm switch for at least 1 hour and means of twoway conversation for at least four hours.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Lift: Enclosed wheelchair lift with doors on upper landing equipped with interlock to prevent opening when lift is not at upper landing.

1. Doors: Not less than 36" wide.
a. Call-Send Station: Locate on right jamb, unless otherwise directed by Architect.

2. Lift Gates: Manufacturer’s standard accordion type car gates.

3. Lower Floor Call-Send Station: Locate on machine housing 40" off floor.

4. Platform: Equip with side barriers and platform gate equipped with interlock hinged opposite machine housing.

B. Finishes: Provide finishes as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 731 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
14 42 10 - 4 Enclosed LU/LA Wheelchair Lift
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and verify dimensions of in-place and subsequent construction.

B. Installation of lift constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed wheelchair lift in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Coordinate lift installation with electrical work.

C. Upon completion of lift installation, test lift operation in presence of Owner's representative and adjust as necessary for smooth, quiet operation.

D. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of lift.

END OF SECTION

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 732 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 1 Fire Suppression System
SECTION 21 10 00

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section and apply to this Section.

2. Division 1 - General Requirements and Section 23 00 10 apply to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other Contract Documents, Contractor(s) shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations:

1. Comply with regulations and requirements of the local Fire Marshall, local building officials and other authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with requirements contained in NFPA Standard 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010 edition for equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing.

3. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirements will govern when so directed by the Architect.

C. Included: Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following.

1. The Work covered by this shall include furnishing all labor, material, equipment and services to design, install and place in operation, a complete Wet Pipe Sprinkler System in compliance with NFPA Standards and based on current fire hydrant flow test report.

2. Provide a NFPA 13 hydraulically calculated design which is complete in all regards including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Connection to water main including required valves, fittings, and similar items.
b. Underground piping pertaining to the Work of this Section including required pipe, valves, thrust blocks, trenching, backfilling, and similar items.
c. Supply Riser, test and drain with required appurtenances and accessories.
d. A complete overhead wet sprinkler system.
e. Access panels for concealed valves.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 733 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 2 Fire Suppression System

3. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, hydrant flow test and report, and fees required for this Work when applicable.

4. Obtain required approvals for the Fire Suppression System in accordance with the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Related work not included in the specification section:

1. All electrical Work, wiring, fire alarm Work, fire extinguishers, monitoring systems and smoke detectors are by others.

2. Painting of exposed pipe.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer’s responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing Fire Suppression Systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Calculations shall be based on result of Fire-Hydrant flow test.

B. Welding:

1. Comply with Section ȱɏ of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2. Comply with the applicable requirements of AWS B2.1, specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard piping system component working pressure: listed for 175 PSIG.

B. Fire Suppression Sprinkler System design shall be approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Hazard classification per NFPA 13, Appendix A.

D. Minimum Density:

1. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM/Sq. Ft. over 1500 Sq. Ft.

2. Ordinary – Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 GPM/Sq. Ft. over 1500 Sq. Ft.

E. Fire Suppression piping shall be seismically braced per NFPA – 13, Seismic Design Category F. Calculations and selection and type of hangers and supports shall be included on the drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

B. Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor(s) has received the "Notice to Proceed", submit 6 copies of the following:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 734 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 3 Fire Suppression System

1. Materials and equipment list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Design drawings including Hydraulic Calculations, stamped as having been approved by the Authority having jurisdiction, showing the complete sprinkler system. The location of drain line terminations shall be approved by the Fire Marshal or his agent.

3. A plan drawing, stamped as having been approved by the Authority having jurisdiction, showing location of underground connections, control valves, and related items.

4. Fire Hydrant Flow Test Report.

5. Details and sections as required to clarify the design.

6. Plans shall conform to appropriate NFPA Standards.

C. Record Drawings:

1. Include a copy of the Record Drawings in each copy of the operation and maintenance manual described below.

D. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two (2) copies of an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of Architectural Sections of these Specifications.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall warrant the installation free from defects for a period of one year from filing Notice of Completion. Correct any deficiencies developing during this period free of charge.

B. The installer shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or breaks in the piping or equipment furnished and/or installed under this Section of the Work for a period of one year after acceptance of Work.

C. The above warranties are in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the contractor under Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A. Below grade fire service piping and fittings shall comply with AWWA standards and be listed for Fire Protection Service.

Acceptable Materials:

1. PVC plastic pipe, CL150, CL200 conforming to AWWA C900 with bell spigot ends and factory installed rubber-sealing ring. Fittings: ductile

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 735 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 4 Fire Suppression System
iron, gray iron, or cast iron mechanical joints with approved manufactured pipe and fitting restraint system.

2. Ductile iron pipe, bell and spigot, factory provided rubber gasket conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A.21.51. Fittings: ductile iron or gray-iron mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 with approved manufactured pipe and fitting restraint system.

3. Refer to NFPA-13 Materials Section for other acceptable piping types and systems.

B. Above grade fire protection system pipe, tube, and fittings shall be approved and listed for use in fire protection systems.

Acceptable Materials: As listed in NFPA-13 piping specifications for pipe, tube materials and dimensions.

2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. Central Sprinkler Corp.

2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

3. Grinnell Fire Protection.

4. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc..

5. Star Sprinkler Inc.

6. Victaulic.

7. Viking Corp.

C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, nonresidential applications.

2. US 1626, for residential applications.

3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.

D. Sprinkler types and categories: Nominal ½ inch orifice for “Ordinary” temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

1. Orifice: ½ inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.

2. Orifice: 17/32, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.

E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 736 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 5 Fire Suppression System

2. Extended-coverage sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.

3. Flow-coverage sprinklers.

4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.

5. High-pressure sprinklers.

6. Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection.

7. Open sprinklers.

8. Pendent sprinklers.

9. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.

10. Quick-response sprinklers.

11. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.

12. Sidewall sprinklers.

13. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers.

14. Upright sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze and painted.

G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

H. Sprinklers Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece flat.

I. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

J. Furnish spare heads, cabinet and tool per NFPA-13

2.3 SECURITY, SIGNS, TAGS AND CHARTS
A. Security: Provide chain, padlock or other tamper proof device connected to the Fire Alarm System for each manually operated shutoff valve required to be in the open position.

B. Signs: Provide identification signs of standard design, fastened securely at designated locations in accordance with NFPA No. 13.

C. Tags: Provide 2" diameter brass tags, stamped with designation numbers, secured with #12 gage copper wire to spindle of control valves.

D. Charts:

1. Provide two copies of the "As-Built" sprinkler system diagram, giving the designated number, function, and location of each valve.

2.4 PIPE HANGERS/EARTHQUAKE PROTECTION
A. Provide Factory Mutual listed hangers, rods, inserts, and accessories by Grinnel, Tolco or equal. Design and install hangers and supports for seismic Zone 4.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 737 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 6 Fire Suppression System

2.5 SUPPLY RISER
A. The Supply Riser shall be installed where schematically shown on the Drawings or directed by the Fire Marshall and be complete with appurtenances and accessories required by NFPA.

B. All control valves shall be “listed” indicating type installed with tamper monitoring device and connected to the Fire Alarm System.

2.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. When required, appropriately lettered wall or free standing Fire Department Connection(s) shall be provided where schematically shown on the Drawings.

B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175- psig minimum pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similar to “AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE.”

1. Type: Flush, with two inlets and square or rectangular escutcheon plate.

2. Type: Exposed, projecting with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.

3. Finish: Polish chrome-plated, Rough chrome plated, Polished brass.

C. Exposed, Freestanding-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175- psig minimum pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body, brass inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom outlet with pipe threads.

Include brass lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18- inch high, brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass escutcheon plate with marking “AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE”

1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated, Rough chromeplated, Polished brass.

2.7 POST INDICATOR VALVE
A. A Post Indicator Valve shall be provided where schematically shown on the Drawings. The valve shall be monitored for tampering and connected to the Fire Alarm System.

2.8 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 738 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 7 Fire Suppression System
A. An Approved Double Check Valve Assembly shall be provided where schematically shown on the Drawings in accordance with the standards of the local water-servicing agency. The assembly shall be monitored for tampering and connected to the Fire Alarm System.

2.9 FIRE HYDRANT(S)
A. Provide fire hydrant(s) with shut-off valve and fittings to meet the local Building Department Engineering standards. Locate as shown on the Drawings.

2.10 WATER MAIN CONNECTIONS
A. Water Main Connections shall be provided where schematically shown on the Drawings per local Building Department or Water District Engineering Standards.

2.11 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION SLEEVES
A. Fire walls and floors:

1. Wall and floor penetrations shall be protected with a U.L. approved fire rated system. The system shall be per the Drawings Details, and or manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Fire stopping materials by Hilti, Metacaulk, or Dow-Corning are considered equal. The material shall be the same as called out for the U.L. approved system.

B. Poured concrete walls and floors.

1. Pipes penetrating poured concrete walls and floors shall be protected by providing sleeves per NFPA standards but not less than the following:
a. A Schedule 40 PVC sleeve one (1) size larger than the pipe b. Protection shall end flush with the wall or floor surface.

C. All walls:

1. Piping passing through walls exposed to view shall be provided with chrome plated split-ring escutcheon plates in finished areas.

Brass or galvanized escutcheon plates may be used elsewhere.

D. At Floors:

1. Pipe sizes 3½" and smaller shall have pipe sleeves 2" larger than the pipe. For Pipes 4" and larger the pipe sleeve shall be 4" larger than the pipe.

2.12 GENERAL
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 739 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 8 Fire Suppression System
B. All fire protection equipment or materials shall be U.L. listed for fire protection use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work shall be brought to the attention of the Architect before the installation of any materials. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Incorrectly installed materials requiring changes will be at Contractor's expense.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the Work of those trades for interface with the Work of this Section.

B. Install the Work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved design drawings and the requirements of the Authority having jurisdiction.

C. Perform trenching and backfilling required for the Work of this Section in strict accordance with Section 23 00 10, pipe manufactures guidelines, and Division 2 Earthwork.

1. As a minimum, depth of cover of piping shall be 30-inches (minimum) and 36-inches (minimum) under driveways and 48- inches (minimum) under railroad tracks.

2. Backfill shall be well tamped in layers. No ashes, cinders, refuse, organic or other corrosive materials shall be used as backfill material.

D. In area having ceilings, conceal all pipes unless directed otherwise by the Architect.

E. In non-ceiling areas, pipe shall be exposed and routed in the truss space.

Where it is not practical to run in the truss space, hold pipes to underside of trusses.

F. All sprinkler heads shall be arranged in straight rows in both directions, as much as possible. Refer to architects’ notes for sprinkler head arrangement.

G. Do not locate sprinkler heads in any luminous ceiling. Methods for sprinklering such areas shall comply with NFPA.

H. Sprinkler heads located where they may easily be damaged, shall be fitted with approved guards.

I. Cut piping accurately to job measurements and install without springing or forcing. Ream cut pipe to full inside diameter. Insure all filings have been removed from inside of the pipe. Install piping generally square with

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 740 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 9 Fire Suppression System
building, free of traps or air pockets and true to line and grade. Do not install piping in any locations where, in the Architect's opinion, it will interfere with the use of the building; where space is inadequate, notify Architect in time to avoid unnecessary Work. Coordinate and install all piping system without interfering with other trades.

J. Make up screwed joints with anti-seize thread lubricant applied to male threads only. Threads shall be American-Standard pipe threads.

K. All low points of the sprinkler system shall have provisions for drainage per NFPA 13. Drain piping shall be run to accessible places approved by the Architect.

L. Support and brace piping to protect from earthquake damage from structure in accordance with NFPA 13. Do not support piping from ductwork, other pipes, or by resting on the structure.

M. Provide access panels per Section 23 00 10 for all concealed valves.

N. The Fire Sprinkler Piping spacing of vertical supports, lateral bracing, and the details of the lateral bracing must comply with NFPA Standards.

O. All tees, plugs, caps, bends, and hydrant branches on pipe-installed underground shall be restrained (pipe clamps and tie-rods, thrust blocks, locked mechanical or push-on joints, mechanical joints utilizing set screw retainer glands, or other approved methods) against movement.

P. All piping shall be painted in compliance of pertinent Architectural Sections.

3.3 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Work in furred areas and below grade and slabs shall not be concealed until such Work has been inspected and approved by the inspecting Authorities. If such Work is concealed without inspection and approval, the installer shall be financially responsible for all Work required to open and restore the concealed areas in addition to any required modification to the system.

3.4 CLEANUP
A. During the process of the Work, premises shall be kept reasonably free of all debris, cutting and waste material resulting from the Work under this Section. All such debris and rubbish shall be removed from the site.

Upon completion and final acceptance of the Work, all debris, rubbish and left-over materials, tools, and equipment shall be removed from the site.

3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, provide necessary personnel and equipment and test and re-test the complete system making adjustments as required, and secure all necessary approvals.

1. Test the system at 200 psi for two (2) hours per NFPA 13.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 741 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
21 10 00 - 10 Fire Suppression System

2. The underground system shall be flushed per NFPA 13, and tested before connection with the overhead section. Backfill the trench between joints before pressure testing to prevent pipe movement.

3. Post Indicating Valves (PIV) shall be tested to insure that the “targets” (OPEN, CLOSED) are clearly identified when valve is opened and closed.

B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all necessary or required inspections by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction to ensure the Work outlined in the Drawings and Specifications complies with the codes.

The Architect shall be notified when the Contractor has arranged for inspections.

C. When the system has been completely approved, secure a Test Certificate from Authority having jurisdiction, and forward two (2) copies of the Certificate to the Architect.

3.6 DISINFECTION
A. Purge sprinkler piping system including underground system.

B. Provide water sample to certified water testing laboratory for initial analysis and disinfecting procedure.

C. Perform purge and disinfecting procedure in accordance with water testing laboratory.

D. Submit final Water Test Report.

END OF SECTION 21 10 00

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 742 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 1 Plumbing
SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section and apply to this Section

2. Division 1 - General Requirements and Section 23 00 13 to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other Contract Documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations:

1. California Plumbing Code (CPC).

2. California Mechanical Code (CMC).

3. California Building Code (CBC).

4. California Green Building Standard Code.

5. National Fire Code (NFC).

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

7. Local Building Department.

8. Local Fire Marshal.

9. Office of the State Fire Marshall.

10. Division of the State Architect.

11. Office of the Statewide Health Planning and Development.

12. California Energy Commission.

13. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirements will govern when so directed by the Architect.

C. Scope of Work: (Plumbing Section Division 15)

1. Material and labor including rough-in for and connection to fixtures, appliances and equipment are:
a. WASTE AND VENT

1. Soil piping

2. Drain waste and vent piping (DWV)

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 743 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 2 Plumbing

3. Indirect waste piping

4. Trench drains.

5. Area drains.

6. Floor drains.

7. Traps.

8. Vent flashings.

9. Interceptors and separators.
b. SEWERS (To five feet beyond building)

1. Including metallic or non-metallic piping used to
convey sewage and other waste to, and including,
connection with offsite utility or onsite treatment and disposal system.

2. Manholes (pre-cast or pre-formed), cesspools, septic tank systems, and leaching lines, backwater valves
and lift stations.
c. STORM AND SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE

1. Roof and overflow drains, including flashing, rain
water drainage piping. Exterior rainwater leader
downspouts (10 gauge and heavier).

2. Drains and bubblers.

3. Gravel basins.

4. Interceptor and separators.

5. Storm water sewers inside property lines.

6. Metal grates and frames.
d. WATER

1. Potable water piping systems including above and
below grade tanks, pressure reducing valves, relief
valves, balancing valves, water hammer shock
absorbers, air chambers.

2. Isolation, Zone and Control Valves.

3. Hot water systems including heaters and storage
tanks.

4. Circulating pumps.

5. Piping for water service.

6. Backflow preventers.

7. Disinfecting of water systems.

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 744 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 3 Plumbing

8. Insulation of piping and equipment for heat, sound,
and vibration.
e. KITCHEN AND LAUNDRY

1. Sinks and dishwashers.

2. Ice makers

3. Garbage disposers.

4. Washing machines, clothes dryers.

5. Clothes dryer vents.

6. All other equipment with piping connections including kitchen unit combinations.
f. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS

1. Including, but not limited to:
(a) Sinks, lavatories, water closets, urinals, tubs,
service sinks, etc., - all materials
(b) Shower pans, shower receptors, and shower
stalls
(c) Supports (backing) for all plumbing fixtures and
accessories
(d) Installation of sinks in or part of drain boards -
all materials
g. AIR PIPING

1. Compressed air systems including compressor plant

2. System controls
h. PIPE IDENTIFICATION – Refer to Section 23 00 13
i. CONNECTIONS

1. Utilities-Sanitary sewer, storm drain, water

2. Make-up water for heating and cooling systems

3. Hot water tanks

4. Temporary water, waste and air lines

5. The joining of pipe by any mode or method including, but not limited to, acetylene and arc welding, brazing, lead burning, plastics welding, soldering, wiped joints, caulked joints expanded or rolled joints, etc., used in connection with any of the work listed herein.
j. LAYOUT AND CUTTING

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 745 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 4 Plumbing

1. Holes, chases, channels, the setting and erection of bolts, inserts, stands, brackets, stanchions, supports, sleeves, escutcheon plates, thimbles, hangers,
conduits, and boxes.
k. LAUNDRY SYSTEMS

1. Water, drain and vapor vent piping

2. Other drain and vent piping and connections thereto
l. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

1. In connection with plumbing and piping work shown
herein
m. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, GUIDES,

EXPANSION JOINTS

1. Including:
(a) Supports for equipment to which pipe is
connected, such as tank supports
(b) Isolators-dielectric and vibration
(c) Anchors and thrust blocks of concrete, metal,
etc.
(d) Seismic bracing
(1) Anvil/Badger, Mason Industries, BLine/TOLCO or approved equal. (2) Seismic hanger system design shall
comply with CBC 2013 requirements
and ASCE 7-05 and 7-10.
n. SIGNS AND NOTICES
o. ROOF FLASHINGS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS
p. TESTS

1. Piping, for tightness

2. Equipment for performance

3. Operating instructions

4. Final operation

1.2 ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC Section 11B-213, 11B-305, & 11B-308.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 746 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 5 Plumbing
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

C. Welder's Qualifications: Comply with ASME B31.8. The pipe welder shall have a copy of a certified ASME B31.8 qualification test report. Contractor shall also conduct a qualification test. Submit each welder's identification symbols, assigned number, or letter, used to identify work of the welder.

Affix symbols immediately upon completion of welds. Welders making defective welds after passing a qualification test shall be given a requalification test and, upon failing to pass this test, shall not be permitted to work this contract.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

B. Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of the following to the Architect for approval prior to acquisition:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. All pieces of equipment shall be clearly identified on corresponding
manufacturer's literature being submitted.

3. Shop Drawings or other data as required to indicate method of installing and attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.

4. All submittals for the entire project shall be submitted at the same time. Submittals shall be provided in a tabulated three ring binder or in PDF format. Incomplete or noncompliant submittals may be rejected.

1.5 DESIGN CHANGES CAUSED BY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Contractor shall pay costs of design and installation for changes resulting from substitution of alternate products.

B. Acceptance of alternate products by Architect does not change this requirement.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 747 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 6 Plumbing
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WASTE, VENT, SEWER AND STORM DRAINAGE
A. Above Grade

1. All waste, vent, sewer and storm lines shall be of cast iron soil pipe and fittings and shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-74 for all pipe and fittings.

Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. AB&I Foundry

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry

3. Tyler Pipe Company
b. Joints

1. Standard joints: for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer's installation instructions and local code requirements. Hubless coupling
gaskets shall conform to ASTM Standard C-564 and
be listed with NSF International.

2. Heavy Duty Joints: for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions and local codes requirements. Hubless couplings
gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 1540 and FM 1680
Class 1. Couplings shall consist of a 304 stainless
steel shields, clamp assembly and a high quality
elastomeric gasket conforming to ASTM 564. Clamp
shall be 4 band constructions, Clamp-All, Tyler 4000
or approved equal.
c. Mandatory Referenced Standards

1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard Specifications - Latest Issue
(a) CISPI 301: Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste,
and Vent Piping Applications.
(b) CISPI 310: Couplings for use in connection
with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications.

2. ASTM Standard Specifications - Latest Issue

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 748 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 7 Plumbing
(a) A-888: Standard Specifications for Hubless
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
(b) C-564: Standard Specifications for Rubber
Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

B. Below Grade:

1. Schedule 40 Solid wall PVC plastic DWV pipe with solventcemented drainage pattern fittings complying with ASTM D 1785 - Latest Issue.

2. Schedule 40 Solid wall ABS plastic DWV pipe with solventcemented fittings complying with ASTM D-2661 - Latest Issue.

C. Condensate (sized per CMC) and indirect waste drains

1. Type M Copper Water Tube ASTM B88 with wrought Copper solder fittings, ANSI-B16.22

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Below Grade Water Service outside building

1. 3" NPS and smaller, Schedule 40 PVC Plastic Pipe and fittings.

ASTM D1785, D2466, with Solvent Cement Joints ASTM D2564.

B. Above Grade (Distribution System inside building)

1. Piping
a. For soldered, brazed, and mechanical joints, 4" and smaller Copper Water Tube Type L Annealed Temper (Hard Drawn)
ASTM B75 or ASTM B88.

2. Fittings
a. Wrought Copper Pressure Solder Fittings, ASME B16.22 or ASME B16-25, 95-5 Tin-Antimony Filler Metal.
b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper alloy, hexagonalstock body, with ball-and-socket, met-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
A. Compressed air piping shall be ASTM-120-A53 black iron schedule 40 threaded steel pipe with ANSI B16 banded black malleable iron fittings.

B. Piping from the receiver to the first shut-off valve shall be schedule 80 threaded steel pipe.

2.4 VALVES

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 749 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 8 Plumbing
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Hammond, Jomar, NIBCO, Watts, others as noted.

Type Size Range Part Number
Ball 2" and smaller (2 piece) Milwaukee UPBA400
Hammond UP8301A
NIBCO 585-80-LF
Ball 2-1/2" and larger (3 piece) Milwaukee UPBA300
Hammond UP8604
NIBCO 595Y-LF
Note: Stem extensions of non-thermal-conductive material and protective sleeve that meets UL 2043 approved for inside air plenum and allows operation of value without breaking the vapor seal shall be used on all insulated pipe. NIBCO NIB-Seal handle or acceptable equal.

Gate 2" and smaller Milwaukee UP115
Hammond UP645
NIBCO T-113-LF
Gate 2½" and larger NIBCO F-619-RW
Gate-Underground 3" and larger Mueller A-2362
NIBCO F-619-RW
Check-Swing 2" and smaller Milwaukee UP509
Hammond UP943
NIBCO 413Y-LF
Check-Spring 2" and smaller Milwaukee UP548T
NIBCO 480Y-LF
Check-Swing 2½" and larger Apollo 61YLF
NIBCO F-910-B-LF
Check-Spring 2½" and larger NIBCO F-938-33
B. All compressed air valves shall be ball valves especially made for compressed air service.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. In general, all pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the following except where special pipe hangers and supports are detailed on the Drawings. In all cases hanger and support details on the Drawings shall take precedent over the following:

Piping 6" Size and Smaller:

Items TOLCO Anvil
Pipe Hanger 1; 2; 200 260
Side Beam Clamp for
Wood Joist
58 207
Beam Coupling for Steel
Beams
65 92
Rod Coupling for
Connection to “Hilti”
70 135

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 750 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 9 Plumbing
Inserts in Concrete Decks 107; 109A; 109AF N/A
Trapeze Hangers Tolstrut A12 AS200
Pipe Clamp TOLCO cush clamp AS002OD-AS098D
B. Similar items by Anvil International, Erico-Caddy, or TOLCO/B-Line will be acceptable.

C. Hanger Rods shall conform to the following table:

Tube/Pipe Size Rod Diameter
½” to 4” 3/8”
5” to 8” ½”
10” to 12” 5/8”
D. Trapeze hangers may be used where parallel runs of pipe occur. All rods on trapeze hangers shall be 1/2" minimum size.

E. Hanger Support Spacing shall be as follows unless shown otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Horizontal:
a. Cast Iron: Every other joint unless over 4 feet, then at every joint.
b. Copper: Every 6 feet for 1-1/2 inch and smaller, and 10 feet for 2 inch and larger.

2. Vertical:
a. Cast Iron: Base and every floor not to exceed 15 feet. b. Copper: Every floor not to exceed 10 feet.

F. Refer to the plumbing code for materials not listed above.

G. At all points where insulated pipe contacts a hanger or support, the point of contact shall be protected by metal insulation pipe shield #B3153 as manufactured by B-Line. Equivalent pipe protectors will be considered provided the substitute item meets the same standard of quality and performance as the specified item.

H. Seismic restraint devices

1. Available Manufactureres:
a. Anvil/Badger
b. Mason Industries
c. B-Line Tolco Division of Eaton

2. Seismic hanger system design shall meet the requirements of IBC, CBC and ASCE 7-05 and 7-10.

2.6 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Fire walls and floors:

7.j.2
Packet Pg. 751 Attachment: Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs (Fire Station 16 Plans and Specs) SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS SAN CARLOS FIRE STATION 16
22 00 00 - 10 Plumbing

1. Wall and floor penetrations shall be protected with a U.L. approved fire rated system. The system shall be per the Drawing Details, or other manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Fire stopping materials by Hilti, Metacaulk, or 3M are considered equal. The material shall be the same as called out for in the U.L. approved system.

B. Poured concrete walls and floors:

1. Pipes penetrating poured concrete walls and floors shall be protected by providing the following:
a. A Schedule 40 PVC sleeve one (1) size larger than the pipe or one quarter (1/4) inch of foam material wrapped around and secured to the pipe or packed and caulked with mineral wool.
b. Protection shall end flush with the wall or floor surface.